492989

Oki MB491 Manual

190
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/203
Next page
Basic
User's Manual
This manual contains cautions on how to use this product safely.
Before you use this product, please make sure that you read this manual.
This manual supports the following models:
MB441, MB451, MB451w, MB461, MB461+LP, MB471
MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4161 MFP
ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb
-2-
P
REFACE
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete, accurate, and
up-to-date. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for the results of errors beyond its control. The
manufacturer also cannot guarantee that changes in software and equipment made by other
manufacturers and referred to in this manual will not affect the applicability of the information in it.
Mention of software products manufactured by other companies does not necessarily constitute
endorsement by the manufacturer.
While all reasonable efforts have been made to make this document as accurate and helpful as possible,
we make no warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of the
information contained herein.
All rights are reserved by Oki Data Corporation. Unauthorized copying, transferring, translating, or
related actions are prohibited. You must obtain written permission from Oki Data Corporation before
doing any of the above.
© 2011 Oki Data Corporation
OKI is a registered trademark of Oki Electric Industry Co., Ltd.
Energy Star is a trademark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Apple, Macintosh, Rosetta, Mac and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
Other product names and brand names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their proprietors.
As an Energy Star Program Participant, the manufacturer has determined that this product
meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efficiency.
This product complies with the requirements of the Council Directives 2004/108/EC (EMC),
2006/95/EC (LVD),1999/5/EC (R&TTE), 2009/125/EC (ErP) and 2011/65/EU(RoHS), as
amended where applicable, on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating
to Electromagnetic Compatibility, Low Voltage, Radio & Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment, Energy related Products and Restriction on the use of certain Hazardous
Substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
The following cables were used to evaluate this product to achieve EMC directive
2004/108/EC compliance and configurations other than this may affect that compliance.
CABLE TYPE LENGTH
(METRE)
CORE SHIELD
Power 1.8

USB 5.0

LAN 15.0

Telephone 3.0

-3-
E
MERGENCY
FIRST
AID
Take care with toner powder:
If swallowed, give small amounts of cold water and seek medical attention. DO NOT
attempt to induce vomiting.
If inhaled, move the person to an open area for fresh air. Seek medical attention.
If it gets into the eyes, flush with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes
keeping eyelids open. Seek medical attention.
Spillages should be treated with cold water and soap to help reduce risk of staining
skin or clothing.
M
ANUFACTURER
Oki Data Corporation,
4-11-22 Shibaura, Minato-ku,
Tokyo 108-8551,
Japan
For all sales, support and general enquiries contact your local distributor.
I
MPORTER
TO
THE
EU/A
UTHORISED
REPRESENTATIVE
OKI Europe Limited (trading as OKI Printing Solutions)
Blays House
Wick Road
Egham
Surrey, TW20 0HJ
United Kingdom
For all sales, support and general enquiries contact your local distributor.
E
NVIRONMENTAL
INFORMATION
-4-
For Your Safety
Read the User's Manual (this manual) for your safety before using the product.
Cautions related to safety
General cautions
Indicates additional information which, if ignored or not followed, may result in personal injury
or death.
Indicates additional information which, if ignored, may result in personal injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the safety
switch inside the machine.
Doing so may cause electric
shock when high voltage
occurs. In addition, the gears
can rotate, which may result
in personal injury.
Do not use an inflammable
spray near the machine.
Doing so may cause fire since
there is an area heating up
within the machine.
Pull the power plug out of the
socket and contact with a
customer service centre when
the cover is unusually hot,
smoking, giving off
questionable odour, or
making a strange noise.
Failure to do so may cause
fire.
Pull the power plug out of the
socket and contact with a
customer service centre when
a liquid such as water enters
in the internal parts of the
machine.
Failure to do so may cause
fire.
Pull the power plug out of the
socket and remove foreign
materials such as clips when
they fall inside the machine.
Failure to do so may cause
electric shock and/or fire
leading to personal injury.
Do not operate and/or
disassemble the machine
other than that directed in
User's Manual.
Doing so may cause electric
shock and/or fire leading to
personal injury.
Unplug the power cord and
contact with a customer
service center if the machine
is dropped or the cover is
damaged.
Failure to do so may cause
electric shock and/or fire
leading to personal injury.
Unplug the power cord
periodically to clean plug
blades and root section
between the blades.
If the power plug remains
inserted for a long time, the
root section will get dusty,
and the plug may be shorted
out, which may cause fire.
Do not clean spilled toner
with a vacuum cleaner.
Cleaning spilled toner with a
vacuum cleaner may cause
fire due to the sparks from
electric contact.
Toner spilled on the floor
should be wiped off with a
wet cloth.
Do not insert materials in the
vent hole.
Doing so may cause electric
shock and/or fire leading to
personal injury.
Do not put cups with liquids
such as water on the
machine.
Doing so may cause electric
shock and/or fire leading to
personal injury.
Do not touch the fuser and
other parts when opening the
cover of the machine.
Doing so may cause burns.
Do not throw toner cartridges
and image drum cartridges
into fire. Doing so may cause
dust explosion leading to
burns.
Do not use power cords,
cables, or ground wires other
than those that are indicated
in User's Manual.
Doing so may cause fire.
Operation using UPS
(uninterruptible power
source) or inverters is not
guaranteed. Do not use
uninterruptible power source
or inverters.
Doing so may cause fire.
WARNING
CAUTION
-5-
This product contains software developed by the Heimdal Project.
Copyright (c) 1995 - 2008 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan
(Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden).
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
CAUTION
Do not come closer to the paper's exit area when
the power is turned on while printing.
Doing so may result in personal injury.
Do not touch a damaged liquid-crystal display.
If liquid (liquid crystal) leaked from the liquid-
crystal display gets into the eyes or mouth, flush
with large amount of water. Seek medical
attention if necessary.
-6-
Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Emergency first aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Importer to the EU/Authorised representative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Environmental information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
For Your Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Manual Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Overview of Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Contents of the Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Available Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Installation Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Names of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installing Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Unpacking Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Turning On and Off Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Installing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Installing a Second Tray Unit (MB461, MB461+LP, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4161 MFP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Default Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Entering Text Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Loading Paper and Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Supported Paper Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Paper Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Storing Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Paper Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Document Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Scannable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Loading Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Basic Settings for Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491,
MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only) . . . . . . 40
Setting for Country Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Connecting a Telephone Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Table of Contents
-7-
Other cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Settings for each dialing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Setup of Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Specifying Sender Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
PBX Connecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Setting for Super G3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Specifying Reception Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Connecting to a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
USB Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configuring the Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Checking the Common Setup Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting Up Scan To E-mail and Internet Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting Up Scan To Network PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Managing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Printing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Printing Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2 Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Starting a Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Canceling a Copy Job in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Configuring Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Changing the Scan Size (Scan Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Changing the Paper Tray (Paper Feed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Changing Image Orientation of Document (Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies (Zoom). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Enabling Continuous Scan Mode (Continuous Scan). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Making Duplex Copies (Duplex Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Adjusting Copy Density (Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Changing Document Type (Document Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Adjusting the Background Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Changing Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Resetting Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3 Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491,
MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb,
MPS4700mb only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Basic Procedure for Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Sending a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Specifying a Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Table of Contents
-8-
Deleting Specified Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Configuring Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing Scan Size (Scan Size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing Resolution (Resolution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Adjusting Density (Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Printing the Sender Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Checking and Canceling Fax Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Canceling Fax Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Canceling a Reserved Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Checking Transmission and Reception History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Machine Behavior in Fax Reception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Reception Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Printing Received Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Registering and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Registering From History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Group Dial (Group Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Registering and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
One-Touch Key Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Register all telephone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Registering the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Basic Procedure for Scan To Fax Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Transmitting Data to Fax Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Specifying the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Deleting the specified destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Stopping the fax transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Basic Procedure for Internet Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Sending an Internet Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Specifying a Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Checking, Deleting, and Changing Destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Canceling Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Receiving Internet Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
4 Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Installing Scanner Drivers (TWAIN/WIA/ICA Driver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
For Mac OS X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Table of Contents
-9-
Using ActKey Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Installing the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Starting the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Setup to use the WSD Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Scanning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Scan to E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Scan to Network PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Scan to USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Scan to Local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Scan to Remote PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Canceling the Current Scan Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Registering Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Register all E-mail addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Registering the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Importing Addresses from a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Registering Network Scan Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5 Using as a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Printing from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Canceling a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Printing From USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Starting a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Configuring Print Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Canceling a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
6 User Authentication and Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
About User Authentication and Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Authentication by PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Registering a PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Enabling Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Operation When PIN Authentication Is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Authentication by User Name and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Registering User Name and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Enabling Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Operation When User Name and Password Authentication is Enabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Table of Contents
-10-
7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Checking Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Error Messages Displayed on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Checking the Machine's Status From the <STATUS> Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Other Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Unable to Print from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Unable to Install a Printer Driver Successfully. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Restrictions on Each OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Copying Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Faxing Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Scanning Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Image Quality Issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Feeding Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Machine Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
When the Power Goes Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
8 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Replacing Consumable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Replacing Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Replacing the Image Drum (MB461, MB461+LP, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4161 MFP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only) . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Replacing the Image Drum (MB441, MB451, MB451w only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Cleaning Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Cleaning the Surface of the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Cleaning the Document Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Cleaning Document Feeding Rollers in the ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Cleaning Paper Feed Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Cleaning LED Heads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Moving Your Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
9 Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Specifications (MB461/MB461+LP/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4161 MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb) . . . . . . . 181
Specifications (MB441/MB451/MB451w) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Basic steps in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Oki contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
-11-
Manual Composition
The following manual is attached to this product.
Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start guide describes the initial setup for each function. The basic operation of each
function is also described.
User's Manual (Basic) ---- This document
In order to understand this machine, the basic operation is described. The initial setup,
Troubleshooting and maintenance procedures are also described.
User's Manual (Advanced)
The Advanced guide describes the advanced operations of each function. The utility and network
setting information is included.
About This Manual
Terms in this document
The following terms are used in this manual:
Indicates important information on operations. Please ensure you read these.
Memo
Indicates important information on operations. Please ensure you read these.
Reference
Indicates where to look when you want to know more detailed or related information.
Symbols in this document
The following symbols are used in this manual:
WARNING
Indicates additional information which, if ignored or not followed, may result in personal injury or death.
CAUTION
Indicates additional information which, if ignored, may result in personal injury.
Symbols Description
[ ] Indicates menu names on the display screen.
Indicates menu, window, dialog names on the computer.
" " Indicates file names on the computer.
Indicates reference titles.
< > key Indicates a hardware key on the operator panel or a key on
the keyboard of the computer.
> Indicates how to get to the menu you want on the menu of
the machine or the computer.
-12-
Legends used in this manual
This document contains the following legends.
PostScript3 Emulation PSE, POSTSCRIPT3 Emulation, POSTSCRIPT3 EMULATION
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
8 64-bit Edition operating system Windows 8 (64bit version)
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2012 64-bit Edition operating system Windows Server 2012
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 64-bit Edition operating system Windows 7 (64bit version)
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
64-bit Edition operating system Windows Vista (64bit version)
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2008 R2 64-bit Edition operating system Windows Server 2008
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2008 64-bit Edition operating system Windows Server 2008(64bit version)
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP x64 Edition operating system Windows XP (x64 version)
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2003 x64 Edition operating system Windows Server 2003 (x64 version)
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
8 operating system Windows 8
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 operating system Windows 7
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista
®
operating system Windows Vista
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2008 operating system Windows Server 2008
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP operating system Windows XP
Microsoft
®
Windows Server
®
2003 operating system Windows Server 2003
Generic name for Windows 8, Windows Server 2012, Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows
XP, and Windows Server 2003 Windows
Web Services on Devices WSD
Unless otherwise noted, 64bit version is included in Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows
Server 2008, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. (64bit version and Windows Server 2008 R2 is
included in Windows Server 2008.)
If there is no special description, Windows 7 is used as Windows, Mac OS X 10.7 is used as Mac OS X,
and MB491 is used as the machine for examples in this document.
Depending on your OS or model, the description on this document may be different.
-13-
Setup
1
1. Setup
In this chapter, the basic setup and operations of this machine are described.
Overview of Machine
This section describes the overview of the machine.
Contents of the Package
Check that you have everything shown below.
Reference
For details on how to open the package, refer to
"Unpacking Your Machine" P. 17.
Machine
Image drum cartridge
Starter toner cartridge
Note
The starter toner cartridges are installed in the image
drum which is installed in the machine before
shipment.
Software DVD-ROM
AC cord
Telephone connector cover
The Telephone Connector Cover is installed on the
Telephone Connector of the main unit.
Telephone cable
In some countries the cables are not supplied.
Note
An Ethernet cable and USB cable are not supplied with
your machine. Procure them separately.
Packaging and cushioning material is required at the time
of shipping the machine. Please keep it as you will need it
should you wish to transport the machine at some point in
the future.
Overview of Machine
-14-
Available Options
The following options are available for your
machine:
Second tray unit (tray 2)
Reference
For details on how to install the options, refer to "Installing
Options" P. 22.
Installation Requirements
Installation Environment
Your machine must be installed in the following
environment:
Note
Be careful of condensation. It may cause a malfunction.
If installing your machine where the humidity of the
surrounding air is less than 30% RH, use a humidifier or
antistatic mat.
Temperature: 10°C~32°C
Humidity: 20%~80% RH(relative
humidity)
Maximum wet
bulb temperature: 25°C
Do not install near high temperature or the fire.
Please do not install in a place from which
chemical reactions take place (laboratory etc.).
Do not install near inflammable solutions, such as
alcohol and thinner.
Do not install in places easily accessible to small
child.
Do not install in an unstable place (the shaky
stand, leaning place, etc.).
Do not install in a place exposed to high humidity,
dust or direct sunlight.
Do not install in an environment exposed to briny
air or corrosive gas.
Do not install in a place with much vibration.
Do not install in a place where the ventilation hole
of the machine is blocked.
Do not place directly on a rug or carpet with long
strands.
Do not install in a closed room with poor
ventilation and circulation.
If you use the machine in a small room for a long
time, please make sure that you ventilate the
room.
Install away from strong magnetic fields and
sources of noise.
Install away from monitors or TVs.
When moving the machine, hold it on both sides,
and move it by slightly letting the back of it fall.
WARNING
CAUTION
Overview of Machine
-15-
Setup
1
Installation Space
Install your machine on a flat surface that is wide
enough to accommodate the machine.
Allow for enough room around your machine
according to the images below.
Top vie w
* MB461+LP/MB491+LP/MPS4700mb: 89cm
Other: 83cm
Side view
Side view (tray 2 installed)
Names of Components
20cm
(193cm)
20cm
50cm
100cm
*
50cm
(96cm)
50cm
(110cm)
No. Name
1 Auto document feeder (ADF) cover
2 Document tray
3 Scanner unit
4 Document glass cover
5Operator panel
6USB port
7Air vents
8Tray 1
9 Manual Feeder (for MB441/MB461/MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP only)
Multipurpose (MP) tray (for MB451/MB451w/
MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb only)
10 Top cover open button
11 Top cover
No. Name
12 Document glass
11
10
9
8
7
3
4
5
6
2
1
12
Overview of Machine
-16-
Internal part of the connector cover
No. Name
13 Fuser unit
14 Starter toner cartridge
15 Image drum
16 LED head
17 Power Switch
No. Name
18 Faceup stacker
19 AC power socket
20 Air vents
21 LINE connection (for MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb only)
22 TEL connection (for MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb only)
16
13
15
17
14
LINE TEL
22
21
18
19
20
No. Name
23 USB interface connection
24 SD memory card slot (for MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb only)
25 Network interface connection
25
23
24
Installing Your Machine
-17-
Setup
1
Installing Your Machine
This section explains how to unpack your machine and how to turn it on and off.
Unpacking Your Machine
The image drum (the green tube) is very delicate. Handle
it carefully.
Do not expose the image drum to direct sunlight or very
bright interior light (approximately more than 1500lux).
Even under the normal interior light, do not leave it for
more than 5 minutes.
Packaging and cushioning material is required at the time
of shipping the machine. Please keep it as you will need it
should you wish to transport the machine at some point in
the future.
1 Remove your machine from the box and
remove cushioning materials and the
plastic bag from your machine.
The accessories are packed within the cushioning
material (1).
2 Lift your machine and place it where it is
to be installed.
Do not open the scanner unit till procedure no.9 is
completed.
3 Remove the protection tapes (2) at the
top and sides of your machine to take
out cushioning materials (3).
4 Remove the protection tapes (4) to open
the MP tray.
5 Remove the protection tape (5) to pull
the paper up.
6 Close the MP tray.
1
2
3
4
5
Installing Your Machine
-18-
7 Open the document glass cover.
8 Remove the protection tapes (6).
Open the ADF and remove packing tapes.
9 Close the document glass cover.
Now, you can open or close the scanner.
10 Open the scanner unit.
11 Remove the protection tapes, and
remove desiccants and films.
12 Press the top cover open button (8) and
open the top cover.
13 Lift the image drum from printer.
Note
Do not expose image drum to light for more than
5 minutes
Do not touch shiny green surface at bottom of image
drum.
14 Remove the silica gel pack before
installation.
6
8
Installing Your Machine
-19-
Setup
1
15 Reinstall the image drum in the
printer:lower it into place in the printer
locating the pegs (1) at each end into
their slots in the sides of the printer
cavity (2).
16 Turn the lever in the direction shown.
The arrow on the lever should align with the arrow on
the image drum.
When the toner cartridge is not fully fixed , a decline in
print quality may occur.
17 Close the top cover.
18 Close the scanner unit.
Reference
Please refer to "Loading Paper" P. 32 for information on
how to load paper into the machine.
Turning On and Off Your Machine
Power Supply Conditions
The power supply must meet the following
conditions:
Note
If the power supply is unstable, use a voltage regulator.
The maximum power consumption of this machine is
950W. Ensure that the power supply is sufficient to operate
this machine.
We do not guarantee the operation where an uninterruptible
power system (UPS) or inverter is used. Do not use an
uninterruptible power system (UPS) or inverter.
Current: 110 - 127VAC
(Range 99 - 140 VAC)
220 - 240VAC
(Range 198 - 264VAC)
Frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 2%
1
1
2
2
There is a risk of getting
an electric shock and/or
causing fire.
Be sure to cut off the power supply when attaching
or removing the power supply plug or the earth
wire.
Be sure to connect an earth wire to the grounding
terminal of exclusive use.
Please do not connect with the ground of a water
pipe, a gas pipe, and a telephone wire, or lightning
rod without fail.
Make sure to connect with the ground terminal
before connecting the power cord to the power
supply plug.
Be sure to perform extraction and insertion of the
power cord with a power supply plug.
Insert the power supply plug into the wall socket
securely.
Do not touch the power cord, or machine, if your
hands are wet.
Install the power cord in a location where it will not
be stepped on, and do not place objects on the
power cord.
Do not twist, bind, or knot the power cord.
Please do not use a damaged power cord.
Do not carry out foot wiring.
Do not connect this machine and other electric
products to the same wall socket. If connected
simultaneously with an air-conditioner, a copy
machine, shredder, etc., electric noise may
interfere with operation. When the connection with
the same wall socket is unavoidable, please use a
commercial noise filter or a commercial noise cut
transformer.
Use the attached power cord and insert it directory
with the ground terminal. Do not use power cords
intended for other products with this machine.
Do not use an extension cord. When use is
unavoidable, use a cord rated higher than 15A.
Use of an extended cord may cause AC voltage
decrease and interfere with normal operation.
During printing, do not shut off the power supply
or pull out the power supply plug.
When not in use for consecutive holidays or long-
term travel, pull out the power cord.
Do not use the attached power cord for other
products.
WARNING
Installing Your Machine
-20-
Turning On Your Machine
1 Plug the AC cable into the AC power
socket of your machine.
2 Plug the AC cable into the electric socket.
3
Check that no documents are on the document
glass or ADF, and the ADF cover is closed.
4 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
The copy standby screen is displayed after
your machine enters ready status.
Turn the power off, and when turning the power back on
again, push the power switch after waiting for a few seconds.
Turning Off Your Machine
Be sure to follow the procedure below every time
you turn off the machine.
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second.
The message [Shutdown in progress.
Please wait. The machine turns off
automatically.] appears in the operator
panel, and power switch indicator blinks
every 1 second. Then the machine turns
off automatically and power switch
indicator goes out.
Note
Turn the power off, and when turning the power back on
again, push the power switch after waiting for a few seconds.
When the machine is not used for
long time
When the machine is not used for long time due
to holidays or trips, pull the power cord from the
socket.
Memo
The machine does not have functional failures if removing
the power plug for long time (more than 4 weeks).
Power Save Mode and Sleep Mode
The two-phase power saving mode enables you
to reduce machine power consumption.
Power Save Mode
When your machine is not used for a certain
period of time, it automatically enters a power
saving mode to reduce power consumption.
You can enter the power saving mode manually
by pressing the <
POWER SAVE> key on the
operator panel.
Installing Your Machine
-21-
Setup
1
The <
POWER SAVE
> key lights up while in the mode.
Memo
By factory default, the time interval to enter the power
saving mode is set to 1 minute. You can change the time
interval by pressing the <SETTING> key on the operator
panel and selecting [Admin Setup] > [Management] >
[Power Save] > [Power Save Time].
Sleep Mode
Your machine goes from the power saving mode
into the sleep mode after a set period of time. In
the sleep mode, the status of your machine is
almost the same as when it is turned off.
The <POWER SAVE> key blinks while in the
sleep mode.
The machine does not enter the sleep mode if an error
occurs.
If time-set transmission is scheduled, the machine will not
go into sleep mode.
If the fax transmission is waiting for a redial, the machine
cannot enter sleep mode.
When the network connection is switched from wired to
wireless, sleep mode is disabled. To enable sleep mode for
devices connected using wireless LAN, enable sleep mode
from the sleep mode setting menu. (MB451w and MB471w
only)
When a device using the wireless LAN connection goes into
sleep mode, the wireless LAN connection is broken. To
reconnect to the wireless LAN, press the power save key
on the device to recover from sleep mode. (MB451w and
MB471w only)
After the device connected to the wireless LAN has
recovered from sleep mode, it automatically connects to
the wireless access point using the same settings as before
it went into sleep mode. However, it may take up to 1
minute to connect. (MB451w and MB471w only)
When the network connection is switched from wireless
LAN to wired LAN, sleep mode is enabled. (MB451w and
MB471w only)
Memo
By factory default, the time interval to enter the sleep
mode is set to 30 minutes. You can change the time
interval by pressing the <SETTING> key on the operator
panel and then selecting [Admin Setup] >
[Management] > [Power Save] > [Sleep Time].
Returning to the Standby Mode
To return the machine to the standby mode from
the power saving or sleep modes, press the
<POWER SAVE> key on the operator panel.
Memo
When your machine receives a print job from a computer
or other devices, it automatically returns to the standby
mode.
Auto Power Off
When your machine is not used for a certain
period of time, the power turns off automatically.
Once the machine turns off, you need to turn on
to use it.
The machine has three settings to select the
machine's behavior on Auto Power Off.
Enable
Auto Config
Disable
Enable
When your machine is not used for a certain
period of time, it turns off the power
automatically.
Auto Config
The machine will not turn off automatically under
the conditions listed below.
- An Ethernet cable is attached to network
interface connection
- A telephone cable is attached to LINE
connection
Disable
The Auto Power Off function is disabled. The
machine will not turn off automatically.
Note
In the following cases, the Auto Power Off function is also
disabled.
- When an error occurs
- When time-set transmission is scheduled
- When the fax transmission is waiting for a redial
-When [Auto Power Off] is [Auto Config.] and
Ethernet cable is attached
-When [Auto Power Off] is [Auto Config.] and
telephone cable is attached
Memo
By factory default, the time interval to turn off the power
is set to 4 hours. You can change the time interval by
pressing the <SETTING> key on the operator panel and
then selecting [Admin Setup] > [Management] >
[Power Save] > [Auto Power Off Time].
By factory default, [Auto Power Off] is set to [Auto
Config] or [Disable]. You can change the setting by
pressing the <SETTING> key on the operator panel and
then selecting [Admin Setup] > [User Install] >
[Power Save] > [Auto Power Off]
Installing Options
-22-
Installing Options
This section explains how to install options on your machine. The following options are available:
Second tray unit (MB461, MB461+LP, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4161 MFP, ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
Be sure to hold down the power switch for about a second to turn off the power and unplug the AC cable and Ethernet or USB
cable before installing options. Installing options while your machine is turned on may damage your machine and options.
Reference
For details on the location of each component of the machine, refer to "Names of Components" P. 15.
Installing a Second Tray Unit (MB461, MB461+LP,
MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4161
MFP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
Install an optional second tray unit (tray 2) when
you want to increase the paper capacity of your
machine. After installation, you need to configure
the printer driver settings.
Reference
For the specification of the second tray unit (Tray2), refer
to "Loading Paper" P. 32.
Installation
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn off the power, and then
unplug the AC cable and the Ethernet or
USB cable.
Reference
"Turning Off Your Machine" P. 20
2 Lift your machine and align the three
pins of the second tray unit with the
holes at the bottom of your machine.
3 Place your machine on the second tray
unit gently.
4 Attach the lock parts.
5 Plug the AC cable and Ethernet or USB
cable into your machine, and then push
the power switch.
Model Number : N22204A
Installing Options
-23-
Setup
1
Printer Driver Configuration
You must be logged in as an administrator to complete this
procedure.
If the following conditions are met for Mac OS X, it is not
necessary to configure the printer driver, as the configured
option information is automatically taken from the
machine.
-USB connection
- When options have been configured on the machine
prior to installing the driver, where there is a connection
to a network using EtherTalk
Windows PCL XPS printer driver is not available for
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server
2003, and Windows XP.
Reference
The printer driver needs to be installed on the computer
before doing this procedure. For details on how to install the
printer driver, refer to "Connecting to a Computer" P. 46.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Driver
1 Click [Start] > [Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printer properties]. (If you
have installed multiple printer drivers,
select [Printer properties] >[OKI
MB491(PCL)] or [OKI MB491(PCL
XPS)]).
3 Select the [Device Options] tab.
4 For the network connection, select [Get
Printer Settings].
For the USB connection, check [
Lower Cassette
].
5 Click [OK].
For Windows PS Driver
1 Click [Start] > [Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the [OKI MB491(PS)] icon
and then select [Printer properties].
(If you have installed multiple printer
drivers, select [Printer properties] >
[OKI MB491(PS)].)
3 Select the [Device Settings] tab.
4 For the network connection, select [Get
installed options automatically]
under [Installable Options], and then
click [Setup].
For the USB connection, select [Installed] for
[Second tray] under [Installable Options].
5 Click [OK].
For Mac OS X PCL/PS Driver
(Mac OS X 10.5 to 10.8)
1 Select [System Preferences] from the
Apple menu.
2 Click [Print & Scan] (For Mac OS X 10.5
and 10.6:[Print & Fax]).
3 Select the name of your machine and
then click [Options & Supplies].
4 Select the [Driver] tab.
Installing Options
-24-
5 If the optional tray is already mounted,
click [Second Tray], and then click [OK].
For Mac OS X PCL/PS Driver
(Mac OS X 10.4.0 to 10.4.11)
Memo
The following procedure uses Mac OS X 10.4.11 as an
example. Depending on an OS, the description may be
different.
1 From [Go], select [Utilities] and then
double-click [Printer Setup Utility].
2 Select the name of your machine and
then click [Show Info].
3 Select [Installable Options].
4 If the optional tray is already mounted,
click [Second Tray], and then click
[Apply Changes].
5 Close [Printer Info].
Operator Panel
-25-
Setup
1
Operator Panel
This section explains the names and functions of components on the operator panel and how to enter
text.
No. Name Function
1 Display screen Displays operating instructions and the status of the machine.
2 Main function keys Switches functions. The selected key lights up in blue.
<COPY> key Switches to the copy start screen.
<SCAN> key Switches to the scanner menu screen.
<PRINT> key Switches to the print menu screen.
<FAX/HOOK> key
(for MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
Switches to the fax/Internet fax menu. On the Fax Menu, hooks
the phone line.
3<START (MONO)> key Starts copying, scanning, faxing, or printing from USB memory in
black and white.
4<START (COLOR)> key Starts scanning in color.
5<STOP> key Cancels the current job immediately.
6<STATUS> key Displays the status menu screen.
Flashes/turns on if there is a status item to be displayed.
7<SETTING> key Displays the equipment setting menu screen.
8<REDIAL/?HELP> key
(for MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
<?HELP> key
(for MB441/MB461/MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP)
Displays the help screen. When closing, press the <
REDIAL/
?HELP
> key, <
Return
> key, or <
RESET/LOG OUT
> key. On
certain screens,dial the phone number which is dialed the last time.
9<RESET/LOG OUT> key In the top screen of each function, logs out.
In the start screen of each function, returns to the top screen.
*In the copy function, the top screen is the same as the start
screen.
In the setting screen, resets a setting value and returns to the
start screen.
10 Ten-key pad Enters numbers.
Enters alphanumeric characters and symbols.
2
19
1
22
20
1854317
12 1413
11
16
15
6789 10
21
Operator Panel
-26-
Default Screen
Turn the power on, and when the machine is
ready for use, the Copy Start screen will be
displayed as the default mode.
You can switch to other functions by using the
main function keys.
Reference
You can change the default screen by pressing the
<SETTING> key on the operator panel and then selecting
[Admin Setup] > [Management] > [Default Mode].
For details, refer to the User's Manual Advanced.
11 <UP> key Shifts the highlighted selection up while an item is selected or
characters are entered.
12 <DOWN> key Shifts the highlighted selection down while an item is selected or
characters are entered.
13 <LEFT> key Returns to the previous screen.
Shifts the highlighted selection to the left while an item is
selected or characters are entered.
14 <RIGHT> key Proceeds to the next screen.
Shifts the highlighted selection to the right while an item is
selected or characters are entered.
15 <OK> key Confirms the highlighted item.
Selects an item to be checked.
16 <BACK> key Returns to the previous screen.
17 <CLEAR> key Executes the following action
Minimizes a setting value.
Enters zero for a setting value.
Clears what is entered.
Cancels a selected item.
18 <POWER SAVE> key Enters or exits the power saving mode.
Exits the sleep mode.
Lights up in green while in the modes.
19 <DATA IN MEMORY> indicator
(for MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
Lights up when data is in memory.
* Sleep mode does not light up even if there is data in the memory.
20 One-Touch key pad Accesses a registered e-mail address or fax number.
8 keys x 2 groups which is 16 entries in total (Press the <SHIFT>
key to switch the groups)
21 <JOB MACRO> key
(for MB471/MB471w/MB491/
MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
Switches to the job macro screen.
22 Qwerty keyboard
(for MB471/MB471w/MB491/
MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
Enters text.
It is under the one-touch key pad.
No. Name Function
Operator Panel
-27-
Setup
1
Entering Text Using the
Operator Panel
When you need to enter text while setting an
item, the entry screen shown below appears.
You can enter upper and lower case letters,
numbers and symbols with the screen keyboard.
Memo
When you need to enter only numbers, the screen
keyboard may not appear. In this case, enter numbers
using the ten-key pad.
Entering Text
1
Press , , , to select the character
you want, and then press .
The selected character is entered in the text field.
2 Repeat step 1 until all the characters
required are entered.
3 Press the and to select [Enter] and
press to complete the entry process.
Using the Ten-key Pad
You can also use the ten-key pad to enter
alphanumeric characters and symbols in the
entry screen.
You can enter the numbers labeled on each key,
as well as the other characters by pressing the
keys repeatedly.
1 Press a key on the ten-key pad until the
character you want appears in the text
file.
2 Repeat step 1 until all the characters
required are entered.
If you continuously press the same key, you can
press the button to move the cursor.
3 Check that [Enter] is selected and press
to complete the entry process.
Memo
You can enter the following characters by pressing the
keys on the ten-key pad.
OK
OK
Ten-key Characters
1 1
2 abc2ABC
3 def3DEF
4 ghi4GHI
5 jkl5JKL
6 mno6MNO
7 pqrs7PQRS
8 tuv8TUV
9 wxyz9WXYZ
0 (Space) 0
* @*
# ._-(Space)+!"$%&'(),/
:;<=>?[\]^#
OK
Operator Panel
-28-
Using the QWERTY Keyboard
(MB471, MB471w, MB491,
MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb)
You can also use the QWERTY keyboard to enter
alphanumeric characters and symbols in the
entry screen.
The keyboard enables you to switch the entry
mode to the standard mode, CAPS mode, or
CTRL mode. The changed mode is reflected to
the screen keyboard display.
Standard mode
It enables you to enter small alphabetical letters.
The following screen keyboard is displayed.
CAPS mode
Pressing the <CAPS> key enables you to enter
capital alphabetical letters.
The following screen keyboard is displayed.
CTRL mode
Pressing the <CTRL> key enables you to enter
symbols.
The following screen keyboard is displayed.
When the QWERTY keyboard cover is open, the numerical
keypad can only be used for entering numbers.
Deleting the Entered Text
You can delete text in the text field in the
following ways.
Pressing the <CLEAR> key
Press the <CLEAR> key to delete the last
character entered.
Hold the <CLEAR> key to delete all the
characters you have entered.
Selecting [BS] on the Screen Key-
board
Press the and and to highlight [BS] and
then press to delete the last character
entered.
Pressing the Backspace Key on the
Qwerty Keyboard (for MB471,
MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb)
Press the backspace key to delete the last
character entered.
OK
Loading Paper and Documents
-29-
Setup
1
Loading Paper and Documents
This section explains the specifications for paper and documents, and how to load them.
Paper
Supported Paper Types
For high-quality printing and to avoid printing problems, be sure to use the supported paper types.
Please use digital photo print paper.
Please check the print quality and the movement of the paper thoroughly beforehand to make sure that
there are no problems. Your machine supports the below-listed types of paper.
Using paper other than the recommended print paper may result in unstable paper output depending on
how the front/back of the paper is loaded. In this case, check beforehand by inserting the paper in the
reverse orientation etc, and confirm that the paper is output correctly before use.
*1 Tray 1 can contain paper 100 to 216 mm (3.94 to 8.5 inches) wide and 148 to 355.6 mm (5.83 to 14
inches) long.
*2 Tray 2 can contain paper 148 to 216 mm (5.83 to 8.5 inches) wide and 210 to 355.6 mm (8.27 to 14
inches) long.
*3 The MP Tray (MB451/MB451w/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb) or Manual Feeder (MB441/MB461/MB461+LP/ES4161 MFP) can contain
paper 86 to 216 mm (3.4 to 8.5 inches) wide and 140 to 1320.8 mm (5.5 to 52 inches) long.
Paper Type Paper Size mm (inch) Paper Weight
Standard paper A4 210 x 297
60 to 163 g/m
2
(16 to 43lb)
For duplex print, 60 to 163 g/m
2
(16 to
43lb)
Note
If the paper size is set at A6, A5, or with a
paper width narrower than 148 mm (A5
width), the printing will be slower.
A5 148 x 210
A6 105 x 148
B5 182 x 257
Letter 215.9 x 279.4
(8.5 x 11)
Legal (13 inch) 215.9 x 330.2
(8.5 x 13)
Legal (13.5 inch) 215.9 x 342.9
(8.5 x 13.5)
Legal (14 inch) 215.9 x 355.6
(8.5 x 14)
Executive 184.2 x 266.7
(7.25 x 10.5)
Statement 139.7 x 215.9
(5.5 x 8.5)
16K
(184 x 260 mm)
184 x 260
16K
(195 x 270 mm)
195 x 270
16K
(197 x 273 mm)
197 x 273
Custom *1*2*3 Width:
64~216
Length:
148~1321
60 to 163 g/m
2
(16 to 43lb)
Loading Paper and Documents
-30-
Paper Type Paper Size mm (inch) Paper Weight
Envelope Monarch 98.4 x 190.5
(3.875 x 7.5)
Envelopes should be 88 g/m
2
(24lb)
paper, and flap parts of envelopes should
be folded
Com-9 98.4 x 225.4
(3.875 x 8.875)
Com-10 104.8 x 241.3
(4.125 x 9.5)
DL 110 x 220
(4.33 x 8.66)
C5 162 x 229
(6.4 x 9)
Index card Index card 76.2 x 127.0
(3 x 5)
Label A4 210 x 297 0.1~0.2 mm
Letter 215.9 x 279.4
(8.5 x 11)
Partly-printing
paper
Subject to the standard paper
64 to 163 g/m
2
(18 to 43lb)
Color paper Subject to the standard paper
64 to 163 g/m
2
(18 to 43lb)
Loading Paper and Documents
-31-
Setup
1
Paper Recommendations
Your MFP will handle a variety of print media,
including a range of paper weights and sizes.
This section provides general advice on choice of
media, and explains how to use each type.
The best performance will be obtained when
using standard 75~90g/m
2
paper designed for
use in copiers and laser printers.
Use of heavily embossed or very rough textured
paper is not recommended.
Pre-printed stationery can be used, but the
ink must not offset when exposed to the high
fuser temperatures used in the printing process.
Envelopes
Envelopes should be free from twists, curls or
other deformations.
They should also be of the rectangular flap type,
with glue that remains intact when subjected to
hot roll pressure fusing used in this type of
printer. Window envelopes are not suitable.
Labels
Labels should also be of the type recommended
for use in copiers and laser printers, in which the
base carrier page is entirely covered by labels.
Other types of label stock may damage the
printer due to the labels peeling off during the
printing process.
Storing Paper
Store paper under the following conditions to
maintain quality:
Inside a cabinet or other dry and dark place
On a flat surface
Temperature: 20°C
Humidity: 50% RH (relative humidity)
Avoid placing:
Directly on the floor
In the direct sunlight
Near the inside of an exterior wall
On an uneven surface
Where static electricity may be generated
Where temperature rapidly changes
Near a printer, air conditioner, heater, or duct
Note
Do not unwrap the paper until you are ready to use the
paper.
Do not leave paper unwrapped for a long period. Doing so
may result in paper handling and print quality issues.
Loading Paper and Documents
-32-
Loading Paper
Your machine has two built-in trays (tray 1 and the MP tray) (MB441, MB461, MB461+LP and ES4161
MFP is Manual Feeder) and an optional tray (tray 2). The Optional tray (Tray2) is only available on
MB461, MB461+LP, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4161 MFP, ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb, and MPS4700mb. Refer to the list below to check the supported paper and capacities of
each tray.
Duplex printing cannot be performed on paper indicated by an "*".
Tray
Supported paper
size
Paper capacity Paper weight
Tray1 A4
A5*
B5
A6*
Letter
Legal 13
Legal 13.5
Legal 14
Executive
Statement*
16K (184 x 260 mm)
16K (195 x 270 mm)
16K (197 x 273 mm)
Custom
250 sheets
(when paper weight is 80
g/m
2
)
Light
60 to 63 g/m
2
(16 to 17 lb)
Medium Light
64 to 74 g/m
2
(18 to 19 lb)
Medium
75 to 87 g/m
2
(20 to 23 lb)
Medium Heavy
88 to 104 g/m
2
(24 to 27 lb)
Heavy
105 to 122 g/m
2
(28 to 32 lb)
Tray2
(optional)
(MB461,
MB461+LP,
MB471,
MB471w,
MB491,
MB491+,
MB491+LP,
ES4161 MFP,
ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb,
MPS4700mb
only)
A4
A5*
B5
Letter
Legal 13
Legal 13.5
Legal 14
Executive
16K (184 x 260 mm)
16K (195 x 270 mm)
16K (197 x 273 mm)
Custom
530 sheets
(when paper weight is 80
g/m
2
)
Light
60 to 63 g/m
2
(16 to 17 lb)
Medium Light
64 to 74 g/m
2
(18 to 19 lb)
Medium
75 to 87 g/m
2
(20 to 23 lb)
Medium Heavy
88 to 104 g/m
2
(24 to 27 lb)
Heavy
105 to 122 g/m
2
(28 to 32 lb)
Loading Paper and Documents
-33-
Setup
1
Loading Paper in Tray 1 and Tray 2
The following procedure explains how to load
paper in tray 1 or tray 2 (optional).
Memo
The following procedure uses tray 1 as an example but the
same is applied to tray 2.
1 Pull out the paper tray.
Note
The paper size selection screen will be displayed when
you pull out the Tray. Register the loaded paper on
your machine. Proceed to "Configuring the Tray
Settings" P. 36.
2 Slide the paper guide (1) to the width of
paper to be loaded.
3 Slide the paper stopper (2) to the length
of paper to be loaded.
MP Tray
(MB451/
MB451w/
MB471/
MB471w/
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
A4
A5
B5
A6*
Letter
Legal 13
Legal 13.5
Legal 14
Executive
Statement*
16K (184 x 260 mm)
16K (195 x 270 mm)
16K (197 x 273 mm)
Custom
Com-9 Envelope*
Com-10 Envelope*
Monarch Envelope*
DL Envelope*
C5 Envelope*
C6 Envelope*
100 sheets
(when paper weight is
80 g/m
2
)
10 envelopes
Light
60 to 63 g/m
2
(16 to 17 lb)
Medium Light
64 to 74 g/m
2
(18 to 19 lb)
Medium
75 to 87 g/m
2
(20 to 23 lb)
Medium Heavy
88 to 104 g/m
2
(24 to 27 lb)
Heavy
105 to 122 g/m
2
(28 to 32 lb)
Ultra Heavy
123 to 163 g/m
2
(33 to 43 lb)
Manual Feeder
(MB441/
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP)
1 sheet
1 envelope
Tray
Supported paper
size
Paper capacity Paper weight
1
2
Loading Paper and Documents
-34-
4 Flex paper back and forth, and then fan
it. Straighten the edges of the paper
stack on a level surface.
5 Load paper with the print side face down.
Note
Do not load paper above the fill line (3).
6 Push the paper tray until it stops.
Register the loaded paper on your machine.
Proceed to "Configuring the Tray Settings" P. 36.
Loading Paper on the MP Tray
(MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
The following procedure explains how to load
paper in the MP tray.
1 Open the MP tray.
2 Pull out the paper support.
3 Pull out the sub support.
[ ▼ ▼ ▼ ]
3
Loading Paper and Documents
-35-
Setup
1
4 Adjust the manual feeding paper guide to
the width of paper to be loaded.
5 Insert the paper with the print side face
up until its edge touches the paper feed
entrance.
Note
Do not load paper above the fill line (1).
6 Press the Set button (2).
Register the loaded paper on your machine.
Proceed to "Configuring the Tray Settings".
Do not load paper of different sizes, types or weights at
the same time.
When adding paper, remove the paper in the MP tray and
straighten the edges of both stacks of paper, and then load
them again.
Do not put anything other than paper for printing.
Memo
When loading envelopes in the MP tray, load them face up
with the orientation as stated below.
- Your envelopes (Monarch, Com-9, Com-10, DL and C5)
are loaded with the flap folded and the flap should come
to the right side to the feeding direction.
Loading Paper in the Manual
Feeder (MB441/MB461/
MB461+LP/ES4161 MFP)
The following procedure explains how to load
paper in the Manual Feeder.
1 Open the Manual Feeder.
2 Adjust the manual feeding paper guide to
the width of paper to be loaded.
3 Load a paper.
Note
Only one sheet can be set in the Manual Feeder each time.
The machine will not load paper when it is in the sleep
mode or power save mode. If it is in either mode when you
use the manual feeder, press the <POWER SAVE> key on
the operator panel. Then it goes to the standby mode.
After that, load paper.
1
2
Loading Paper and Documents
-36-
Configuring the Tray Settings
After you load paper in tray 1, tray 2 (optional),
or the MP tray, you need to register the loaded
paper on your machine.
With Tray 1/Tray 2: The paper size selection
screen will be displayed automatically when you
pull out the Tray. Please use settings from
Section 4.
With MP Tray: Please use settings from Section 1.
1
Press the <
SETTING
> key on the operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Paper Setup] and
then press .
3
Press the to s
elect the paper tray in
which you loaded paper and then press .
4
S
elect [Paper Size] and then press .
5 Press the to select the size of the
loaded paper and then press .
Reference
If [Custom] is selected for [Paper Size], you need to
register the custom size. For how to register the
custom size, refer to "Registering Custom Sizes" P. 36.
6 Press the to select [Media Type] and
then press .
7 Press the to select the type of media
loaded and then press .
8 Press the to select [Media Weight]
and then press .
9 Press the to select the weight of the
loaded paper and then press .
10 Press the until the top screen is
displayed.
Registering Custom Sizes
To load custom size paper, you need to register
the width and length of the paper before printing.
The range of the sizes you can set differs
according to the paper tray.
Note
For tray 1 and tray 2, you can configure the [Custom]
setting only when [Paper Size] is set to [Custom].
The available size range for duplex printing is the same as
that for tray 2.
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Paper Setup] and
press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Tray Available size range
Tray1 Width:
100 to 216 mm (3.94 to 8.5 inches)
Length:
148 to 355.6 mm (5.83 to 14.0
inches)
Tray2
(Optional)
(MB461,
MB461+LP,
MB471,
MB471w,
MB491,
MB491+/
MB491+LP,
ES4161 MFP,
ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb,
MPS4700mb
only)
Width:
148 to 216 mm (5.83 to 8.5 inches)
Length:
210 to 355.6 mm (8.27 to 14.0
inches)
MP tray
(MB451/
MB451w/
MB471/
MB471w/
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb)
Manual
Feeder
(MB441/
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP)
Width:
86 to 216 mm (3.4 to 8.5 inches)
Length:
140 to 1320.8 mm (5.5 to 52.0
inches)
OK
Loading Paper and Documents
-37-
Setup
1
3
Press the to select the paper tray in
which you loaded paper and then press .
4 Press the to select [Custom] and then
press .
5 Enter the desired value using the ten-key
pad and then press .
Press the or to move to the next box.
6 Press the until the top screen is
displayed.
Paper Output
Your machine outputs to the facedown or faceup
stacker. Paper types that can be outputted to
each stacker are as follows.
When performing duplex printing, paper outputs
to the facedown stacker.
Do not open or close the faceup stacker while printing as it
may result in a paper jam.
Using the Facedown Stacker
Delivers paper with the print side face down.
Note
Check that the faceup stacker on the rear side of the
machine is closed. If the faceup stacker is open, paper is
always outputted to the faceup stacker.
Using the Faceup Stacker
Delivers paper with the print side face up.
Note
The faceup stacker is not available in duplex printing.
1 Pull the faceup stacker on the rear side
of the machine and open it toward you.
2 Unfold the faceup stacker.
Documents
You can use the auto document feeder (ADF) or
the document glass to load documents for
copying, scanning or faxing.
Document Requirements
You cannot load the following documents on the
ADF. Use the document glass instead:
Torn or perforated paper
Curled or rolled paper
Wet paper
Static paper
Carbon-backed paper
Fabrics, metallic sheets or Transparency films
Paper with staples, paper clips, ribbons, or tape
Pasted paper, paper with glue
Glossy paper
Specially coated paper
Output
Stacker
Supported
paper type
Paper output
capacity
Facedown Standard
Recycled
paper
150 sheets (when
paper weight is less
than 80 g/m
2
)
OK
OK
OK
Loading Paper and Documents
-38-
Keep the following in mind to avoid damaging the
document glass:
Do not hold a document firmly on the glass when
copying a thick document.
Place hard documents gently.
Avoid loading documents with sharp projections.
Scannable Area
The text or images on the shaded area shown
below are not scanned.
Memo
The arrow in the above drawing indicates the feeding
direction in the auto document feeder, or the scanning
start side on the document glass.
Loading Documents
For documents using adhesives, ink, or correction fluid, set
them after checking that these have completely dried.
Duplex scanning cannot be performed on paper indicated
by an "*".
"**" supported only MB461+LP/MB491+LP/MPS4700mb.
Loading Documents on the ADF
1
Load your documents face up on the ADF.
If your documents are portrait, load them with the
top edge of the documents in first.
If your documents are landscape, load them with
the left edge of the documents in first.
2 Adjust the document guides to the width
of your documents.
Loading Documents on the Docu-
ment Glass
1
Lift and open the document glass cover.
2 Place a document face down on the
document glass.
If your document is portrait, align its top edge to
the upper-left corner of the glass.
Scanner
type
Scannable
size
Paper
capacity
Paper
weight
ADF A4
A5
B5
A6*
Letter
Legal 13
Legal 13.5
Legal 14
Executive
50 sheets
(80 g/m
2
)
60 to 105 g/m
2
(16 to 28 lb)
Document
glass
A4
A5
B5
A6
Letter
Executive
Legal 13**
Legal
13.5**
Legal 14**
-20 mm
2 mm
2 mm
2 mm
2 mm
Loading Paper and Documents
-39-
Setup
1
If your document is landscape, align its right edge
to the upper-left corner of the glass.
3 Close the document glass cover gently.
Reference
Set [Document Direction] according to the direction of
your document to get the output you want. The factory
default is [Portrait]. Refer to "Changing Image
Orientation of Document (Direction)" P. 81.
When you take a copy with the document glass, do not
apply an excessive load to the document glass.
Basic Settings for Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
-40-
Basic Settings for Faxing (for MB451, MB451w,
MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP,
ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
This section explains basic settings for faxing. Be sure to configure the following settings before you transmit faxes.
Setting for Country Code
Please select the correct country code.
If [
Country Code
] is set to the wrong value, there is a possibility
that fax transmission and reception may not function correctly.
Though the line connection is correctly, if the fax transmission or
reception fails, ensure the [
Country Code
] setting first.
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
2
Press the <
SETTING
> key on the operator panel.
3 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
4 Enter the administrator password.
The default password is "aaaaaa".
a Press , , , to select the
character you want, and then press .
- The selected character is entered as "*"
in the text filed.
- If you have entered an incorrect value,
press the <CLEAR> key and then
enter the correct value.
b Repeat step a until all characters
required are entered.
c Press the and to select [Enter] and
press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Fax Setting] and
then press .
7 Press the to select [Country Code]
and then press .
8 Press the or to select your country
name and then press .
If your country name is not displayed, select
the following value.
- If your country is Czech Republic or
Slovakia, select [Czech/Slovakia].
- If your country is Canada, select [U.S.A].
- If the region of your country is Latin
America, select [Latin America].
- If the region of your country is Europe or
Middle East, select [International].
Settable Country Code:
9 If the confirmation message is displayed
then press .
The machine will re-start automatically
and the default screen will be displayed a
few minutes later.
10 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn off the power.
Memo
If the Country Code is changed, the values of [PBX Line]
and [MF (Tone)/DP (Pulse)] are changed to the default
values for each Country Code.
OK
OK
U.S.A. International United Kingdom Ireland
Norway Sweden Finland Denmark
Germany Hungary Czech/Slovakia Poland
Switzerland Austria Belgium Netherlands
France Portugal Spain Italy Greece Australia
New Zealand Singapore Hong Kong Latin
America Mexico China Russia Taiwan Japan
Korea Thailand Malaysia Jordan Argentina
Brazil South Africa Belarus Moldova Turkey
Ukraine
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Basic Settings for Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
-41-
Setup
1
Connecting a Telephone Line
Depending on your environment, a method to
connect the telephone line is different. Based on
the following figures, connect the line for your
environment.
Turn off the machine when you connect the telephone line
with the machine.
You cannot connect to the ISDN line directly. To connect to
it, use the terminal adopter (TA) and connect to the LINE
connection of the machine.
Don't connect with USB cable or LAN cable at this point.
Memo
Depending on your environment of the machine, Checking
the reception mode, refer to "Specifying Reception Mode"
P. 4 5 .
Checking the dial type settings, refer to "Settings for each
dialing type" P. 43.
Connecting to the Public Line
(Connecting for Fax Only)
1 Plug one end of the [Telephone cable]
into the [LINE connection] of your
machine and the other end into a
[Public Line (Analog)].
Connect telephone cable to [
LINE connection
] without
fail. Never connect it to [
TEL connection
].
Connecting to the Public Line
(Connecting for Fax and Telephone)
1 Plug one end of the [Telephone cable]
into the [LINE connection] of your
machine and the other end into a
[Public Line (Analog)].
2
Remove the [
Telephone connector cover
]
.
3 Plug the external telephone's cable into
the [
TEL connection
] of your machine.
The telephone that is connected to the machine
is called an external telephone.
Note
Only one telephone can be connected to this machine.
Don't connect the telephone to the machine in parallel. If you
connect the telephone to the machine in parallel, the following
problem will occur and the machine will not work correctly.
LINE connection
Telephone cable
Public Line
(Analog)
LINE connection
Telephone cable
Public Line
(Analog)
Telephone connector
cover
TEL connection
Basic Settings for Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
-42-
- Picking up the telephone receiver when sending or
receiving a fax may interrupt pictures or cause
communication error to occur.
- The fax transfer function is not able to work from the
external telephone.
Memo
In the case of direct interconnection, separate construction is
needed. Please contact the telephone company that you use.
Other cases
Turn off the machine when you connect the telephone line
with the machine.
Connecting to the ADSL Environment
Plug the [Telephone cable] connected to the
ADSL modem into the [LINE connection] of
your machine.
Remove the telephone connector cover.
Plug the external telephone's cable into the [TEL
connection] of your machine.
Memo
Check the dial tone detection if it is unable to dial and refer
to "Admin Setup - User install" P.103 Advanced.
If you cannot send or receive faxes well, set [
Super G3
] to
off. Refer to "Setting for Super G3" P. 45.
Connecting to IP Telephone
Plug the [Telephone cable] connected to the IP
telephone into the [LINE connection] of your
machine.
Remove the telephone connector cover.
Plug the external telephone's cable into the [TEL
connection] of your machine.
Memo
Check the dial tone detection if it is unable to dial and refer
to "Admin Setup - User install" P.103 Advanced.
If you cannot send or receive faxes well, set [
Super G3
] to
off. Refer to "Setting for Super G3" P. 45.
Connecting CS Tuner or Digital
Television
Plug the [Telephone cable] connected to the
[Public Line (Analog)] into the [LINE
connection] of your machine.
Remove the telephone connector cover.
Plug the telephone cable connected to the CS tuner
or digital television into the [TEL connection] of
your machine.
Public Line (Analog) Public Line (Analog) first floor second floor
TEL connection
LINE connection
Telephone cable
Splitter
ADSL modem
Public Line
(Analog)
LINE connection
TEL connection
Telephone cable
Optical IP telephone
Corresponding telephone
*Insert into the
telephone cable jack.
Optical Network Unit (ONU)
Optical cable
LAN
cable
LINE connection
TEL connection
CS tuner or digital
television
Telephone cable
Public Line
(Analog)
Basic Settings for Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
-43-
Setup
1
Connecting PBX, Home Telephone or
Business Phone
Plug the [Telephone cable] connected to the
[Public Line (Analog)] into the [LINE
connection] of your machine.
Remove the telephone connector cover.
Plug the telephone cable connected to a control
device including PBX, etc. into the [TEL
connection] of your machine.
- Home Telephone -
A number of telephones are connected with one or
two telephone lines to allow internal and door
phone communication. This is simple switching
equipment for household.
- Business Phone -
More than two telephone lines can be
accommodated, and these telephone lines can be
shared with a number of telephones to allow
internal communication. This is simple switching
equipment.
Connecting as an Internal Telephone
Plug the [Telephone cable] connected to a
control device including PBX, etc. into the [LINE
connection] of your machine.
Memo
Set [PBX Line] to [ON]. Refer to "PBX Connecting" P. 45.
Settings for each dialing type
The factory default [MF (Tone)/DP (Pulse)] is
set to [Tone].
For push-button phones, if you hear a "Beep, boop,
beep" sound, leave [MF (Tone)/DP (Pulse)] as
[Tone].
For push-button type phones, if you do not hear a
"Beep, boop, beep" sound, or if you are using a
rotary-dial type phone, set [MF (Tone)/DP
(Pulse)] to [Pulse].
How to Configure Settings
1
Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup],
and press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
The factory default password is "aaaaaa".
4 Select [Enter], and press .
5 Press the to select [User Install],
and press .
6 Press , select [MF (Tone)/DP
(Pulse)], and then press .
7 Press , select Dial Type, and then press
.
LINE connection
TEL connection
Telephone cable
Public Line
(Analog)
Control device
including PBX,
etc.
LINE connection
Public Line
(Analog)
Telephone cable
Control device
including PBX,
etc.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Basic Settings for Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
-44-
8
Press the until the top screen is displayed.
Setup of Date/Time
Setup of Date/Time of your region.
Reference
You can set up date and time automatically using Webpage.
For details, refer to the User's Manual Advanced.
1
Press the <
SETTING
> key on the operator panel.
2 Press the select [Easy Setup] and
then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
The factory default password is "aaaaaa".
4 Select [Enter], and press .
5 Press the to select [Date/Time
Setting] and then press the
.
6 Press the to select the appropriate
time zone and then press .
7 Press the to select [Manual] and then
press .
8 Press the or to select the current
date and then press .
To move to the next box, press the .
9 Press the or to select the current
time and then press .
To move to the next box, press the .
10
When the setup menu screen is displayed,
press to complete the setup.
Specifying Sender Information
Specify the fax number and sender name for
your machine.
1
Press the <
SETTING
> key on the operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Easy Setup] and
press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
The factory default password is "aaaaaa".
4 Select [Enter], and press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setting] and
then press the .
6 Press to select the [Fax Number]
entry box.
7 Enter the fax number of your machine
with the numerical keypad.
8 Select [Enter] and then press .
9
Press to select the [
Sender ID
] entry box.
10 Enter arbitrary sender information.
Up to 22 characters can be entered.
Memo
When a receiver prints faxes, sender information
entered here is printed on the top of the faxes.
11 Select [Enter] and then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Basic Settings for Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
-45-
Setup
1
12
When the setup menu screen is displayed,
press to complete the setup.
PBX Connecting
When connecting to PBX (internal exchange), put
[PBX Line] to [ON].
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
The default password is "aaaaaa".
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Fax Setup] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Fax Setting] and
then press .
7 Press the to select [PBX Line] and
then press .
8 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
9 Press the until the top screen appears.
Setting for Super G3
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
The default password is "aaaaaa".
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [User Install] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [Super G3] and
then press .
7 Press the to select [OFF] and then
press .
8 Press the until the top screen appears.
Specifying Reception Mode
The optimal reception mode differs depending on
the environment for your machine. Refer to the
following description.
Fax Ready Mode
This mode is recommended when you use the
machine as a fax machine.
Tel/Fax Ready Mode
This mode is recommended when you connect an
external phone to the machine.
Ans/Fax Ready Mode
This mode is recommended when you connect an
external answering machine to the machine.
Tel Ready Mode
This mode is recommended when you generally
use an external phone connected to the machine.
DRD
This mode is recommended when you use the
distinctive ring detection (DRD) function provided
by a telephone company.
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
The factory default password is "aaaaaa".
4 Select [Enter] and press .
5 Press the to select [User Install] and
press .
6 Press the to select [Reception Mode]
and press .
7 Press the to specify the reception
mode and press .
8 Press the until the fax start screen
appears.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Settable Reception Mode:
Fax Ready Mode* Tel/Fax Ready Mode
Ans/Fax Ready Mode Tel Ready Mode DRD
*indicates the factory default.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Connecting to a Computer
-46-
Connecting to a Computer
This section explains how to connect your machine to a computer and install a printer and fax driver.
Connecting method
You can select either of the following connection methods:
"Network Connection" P. 47
"USB Connection" P. 60
Product Requirements
Your machine supports the following operating systems:
Windows 8/Windows 8 (64bit Version)
Windows Server 2012
Windows 7/Windows 7 (64bit Version)
Windows Vista/Windows Vista (64bit Version)
Windows Server 2008 R2
Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 (x64 Version)
Windows XP/Windows XP (x64 Version)
Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2003 (x64 Version)
Mac OS X 10.4.0 to 10.8
Types of Drivers
The types of the drivers that can be installed are as follows.
For Windows
For Mac OS X
Depending on a version of a printer driver, Windows or Mac OS X, the description may be different.
Type Description
PCL The PCL printer driver is suitable for printing of business documents.
PS The PS printer driver is suitable for printing of documents including PostScript fonts and EPS
data.
PCL XPS The PCL XPS printer driver is suitable for printing from an application for XPS.
* It does not support Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows XP/ Windows Server 2003.
FAX It is installed when directly sending faxes to destinations from the computer via the machine.
Type Description
PS The PS printer driver is suitable for printing of documents including PostScript fonts and EPS
data.
It can be also used for normal printing.
PCL The PCL printer driver is suitable for printing of business documents.
Connecting to a Computer
-47-
Setup
1
Network Connection
Perform the following procedure to connect your
machine to a computer via network.
Connecting using wired LAN
Connecting an Ethernet Cable
Be sure to connect your machine to a network
with an Ethernet cable before driver installation.
1 Prepare an Ethernet cable and a hub.
Prepare an Ethernet cable (category 5, twisted
pair, straight) and a hub separately.
2 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power and
computer.
Reference
"Turning Off Your Machine" P. 20
3 Plug one end of the Ethernet cable into
the network interface connection on the
back of the machine.
4 Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable
into the hub.
Connecting using wireless LAN
(MB451w, MB471w only)
Configuring automatically using
push-button method
Use the WPS (push button) function to set the
wireless LAN.
1 Log in as the administrator.
2 Press the to select [Network Menu],
and then press the .
3 Press the to select [Network Setup],
and then press the .
4 Press the to select [Wireless
Setting], and then press the .
5 Press the to select [Automatic setup
(WPS)], and then press the .
6 Press the to select [WPS-PBC], and
then press .
7 Press the to select [Yes], and then
press .
2
OK
OK
Connecting to a Computer
-48-
Memo
Start the WPS push button for wireless AP after
clicking [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Alternatively, if WPS push button for wireless AP is
started first, start the WPS push button on this
equipment.
If [No] is selected, the screen returns to that from
step 6.
8 If [Yes] is selected in step 7, [Running
pushbutton method...] is displayed in
the screen.
Note
Panel operations cannot be performed during WPS
execution.
When [Connection successful] is displayed, this
equipment is connected to the wireless LAN.
Memo
If [Timeout] is displayed, it is possible that the
wireless AP of the connection destination could not be
found within the time limit. Select [Yes] again in step
7 within 2 minutes of starting WPS push button for
wireless AP.
If [Overlap] is displayed, WPS-push button is being
executed on 2 or more wireless AP. Please wait for a
short time and then retry.
Configuring automatically using
PIN method
1 Log in as the administrator.
2 Press the to select [Network Menu],
and then press the .
3 Press the to select [Network Setup],
and then press the .
4 Press the to select [Wireless
Setting], and then press the .
5 Press the to select [Automatic setup
(WPS)], and then press the .
6 Press the to select [WPS-PIN], and
then press .
7 Press the to select [Yes], and then
press .
Memo
If [Yes] is selected in step 7, [Implementing PIN
method...] is displayed in the screen.
If [No] is selected, the screen returns to that from
step 6. Each time the confirmation screen is displayed,
the PIN code is automatically generated and changed.
8 Enter the displayed 8 character PIN code
to the wireless AP, and start WPS-PIN for
the wireless AP.
Note
Panel operations cannot be performed during WPS
execution.
When [WPS connection successful] is displayed,
this equipment is connected to the wireless LAN.
Alternatively, if WPS-PIN for wireless AP is started
first, start the WPS-PIN on this equipment.
OK
OK
Connecting to a Computer
-49-
Setup
1
Memo
If [Timeout] is displayed, it is possible that the
wireless AP of the connection destination could not be
found within the time limit. After entering the PIN
code from this equipment into the wireless AP and
starting WPS-PIN, select [Yes] in step 7 again within 2
minutes.
Configuring wireless network selection
1 Log in as the administrator.
2 Press the to select [Network Menu],
and then press the .
3 Press the to select [Network Setup],
and then press the .
4 Press the to select [Wireless
Setting], and then press the .
5 Press the to select [Wireless
Network Selection], and then press
the .
6 The product starts to search the wireless
access point.
7 A list of access points found by the
search will be displayed. Select the
access point you wish to connect to using
the keys, then press .
8 Enter the security password of the
selected access point.
(1) With WEP
a) [Enter the WEP key] will be displayed.
Enter the encryption key using the
keys, and press .
Go to Section 9
(2) With WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
a) [Enter the Pre-shared key] will be
displayed. Enter the encryption key using
the
keys, and press .
Go to Section 9
(3) With WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP
a) Configure settings from Web Page.
(4) With Disable
a) The password input screen will not be
displayed. Go to Section 9.
9 In the confirmation screen, please check
the contents on the confirmation screen,
select [Yes], and press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
Connecting to a Computer
-50-
10 Connection successful will be displayed
once you have successfully connected to
the wireless LAN.
Memo
If unable to connect to a wireless LAN, [Connection
failed] will be displayed and you will be returned to
the Wireless Settings screen in Section 5.
Configuring manually
1
Log in as the administrator.
2 Press the to select [Network Menu],
and then press the .
3 Press the to select [Network Setup],
and then press the .
4 Press the to select [Wireless
Setting], and then press the .
5 Press the to select [Wireless
Network Selection], and then press
the .
6 The product starts to search the wireless
access point.
7 A list of access points found by the
search will be displayed. With the key,
select [Manual Setup], which will be
displayed at the very bottom.
8 Press the to select [SSID], and then
press the .
Memo
When the [OK] button is pressed, the screen switches
to the security settings screen in step 5 without
switching to the screen in step 6. If the SSID is not
set, a warning screen is displayed.
9 Enter the SSID name (within 1-32
characters) of the wireless AP that you
want to connect to.
After entering the SSID, move the cursor
to the [Done] field and press .
10 In the security settings screen, select the
same security setting as the wireless AP
that you want to connect to.
Memo
The default is [Disable].
Depending on the model of wireless AP, mixed WPA-
PSK/WPA2-PSK may be supported. In this case, we
recommend using WPA2-PSK.
Note
Security settings (WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP) using an
authentication server are also supported, but this can
only be set from the Web. For details, see the
Advanced section of the User Manual.
OK
OK
Connecting to a Computer
-51-
Setup
1
11 Depending on the security setting
selected in step 8, execute the settings
from either (1) or (2) below. If [Disable]
is selected, proceed to step 10. (For
security reasons, we do not recommend
setting [Disable].)
(1) When WEP is selected:
a) Press the on the WEP KEY input screen.
Memo
Nothing is set by default. If the WEP KEY is already
set, it is displayed using "*" symbols. When the [OK]
button is pressed, the screen switches to the screen in
step 10 without switching to the screen in step b). If
the right button is pressed to switch to the screen in
step b) when a WEP KEY is set, the set KEY is cleared.
Note
There is not setting for the WEP KEY index. The WEP
KEY index communications with the wireless AP as 1.
b) Enter the same KEY as the WEP KEY set
for the wireless AP that you want to
connect to.
After entering the WEP KEY, move the
cursor to the [Done] field and press .
Memo
After entering the KEY, the key is displayed as "*"
symbols for security reasons.
(2) When WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is
selected:
a) Press the to select the encryption type,
and then press .
Memo
The default is [TKIP].
Depending on the model of wireless AP, the mixed
TKIP/AES may be supported. In this case, we
recommend using AES.
b) Press the on the Pre-shared KEY input
screen.
Memo
Nothing is set by default. If a Pre-shared KEY is
already set, "*" is displayed. When the [OK] button is
pressed, the screen switches to that shown in step 10
without switching to the screen shown in step c). If
the right button is pressed to switch to step c) when a
Pre-shared KEY is set, the set KEY is cleared.
c) Enter the same KEY as the Pre-shared KEY
set for the wireless AP that you want to
connect to.
After entering the Pre-shared KEY, move
the cursor to the [Done] field and
press .
Memo
After entering the KEY, the key is displayed as "*"
symbols for security reasons.
12 In the confirmation screen, check the
entered SSID and selected security
settings.
If there are no problems, press the to
select [Yes], and then press .
13 If [Yes] is selected in step 10,
[Searching for connection...] is
displayed in the screen.
When [Connection successful] is
displayed, this equipment is connected to
the wireless LAN.
OK
OK
OK
OK
Connecting to a Computer
-52-
Memo
If [
Timeout
] is displayed, the connection destination wireless
AP may not have been found within the specified time. Check
the SSID, security settings, and KEY settings, and retry.
Reconnect to the wireless LAN
When the wireless is enabled, restart the wireless
function. If a problem has occurred in the wireless
AP communication or performance, the wireless
function can be restarted.
(If the wired is enabled, the wireless function is
enabled with the configured wireless settings.)
1 Log in as the administrator.
2 Press the to select [Network Menu],
and then press the .
3 Press the to select [Network Setup],
and then press the .
4 Press the to select [Wireless
Setting], and then press the .
5 Press the to select [Wireless
Network Selection], and then press .
6 Press the to select [Yes], and then
press .
7 When [Yes] is selected in step 6,
[Searching for connection...] is
displayed in the screen.
After this, [Connection successful] is
displayed, and the wireless LAN can be
used on this equipment.
Memo
If [A Timeout occurred.] is displayed, the connection
destination wireless AP may not have been found within
the required time. The SSID, security settings, and KEY
need to be configured to match the wireless AP settings.
Check each of the settings. For details on each of the
setting items, see "Using the wireless LAN".
Switching from wireless to wired
The network connection can be switched from
wireless to wired.
1 Log in as the administrator.
2 Press the to select [Network Menu],
and then press the .
3 Press the to select [Network Setup],
and then press the .
4 Press the to select [Enabling Wired
Communications], and then press .
5 Press the to select [Yes], and then
press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
Connecting to a Computer
-53-
Setup
1
Install a Printer and Fax Driver
(for Windows)
To complete the network connection with a
Windows computer, first set IP addresses for the
machine, and then install a printer and fax driver
on the computer.
If there is no DHCP server or BOOTP server on
the network, you need to manually configure the
IP address on the computer or machine.
Your network administrator or Internet service
provider specifies a unique IP address for the
computer and your machine. Set the IP
addresses manually.
You need to complete the network setting of the computer
before this procedure.
To complete this procedure, you must be logged in as an
administrator.
When setting an IP address manually, ask the network
administrator or your Internet service provider which IP
address to use. If the IP address is set wrong, the network
may go down or Internet access may be disabled.
Memo
If configuring a small network consisting of only your
machine and a computer, set IP addresses as shown below
(according to RFC1918).
To set [Network Scale], press the <SETTING> key and
then select [Admin Setup] > [Network Menu] >
[Network Setup] > [Network Scale].
First, Set the IP address of the machine.
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
2 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
3 Press the to select [Easy Setup], and
press .
4 Enter the administrator password.
The factory default password is "aaaaaa".
5 Select [Complete], and press .
6 Press the and [Network Setting],
and then press the .
7 If setting the IP address manually, check
that [Manual] is selected, and press .
If obtaining the IP address automatically, press
the and select [Auto], and press . Proceed
to step 12.
8 Enter the IP address and press .
To move to the next box, press the .
9 Enter the subnet mask and press .
To move to the next box, press the .
10 Enter the default gateway address and
press .
To move to the next box, press the .
11 Enter the DNS server and WINS server if
needed.
If it is not necessary to connect the DNS server or
WINS server to the network, press until the
pop-up message showing the setting completion is
displayed.
12 When the setup menu screen is
displayed, press to complete the
setup.
For the computer
IP address : 192.168.0.1~254
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Default gateway : not used
DNS server : not used
For the machine
IP address Set : Manual
IP address: 192.168.0.1~254 (select a dif-
ferent value from the com-
puter)
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0
Network Scale : Small
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Connecting to a Computer
-54-
Next, install the printer and fax driver into the
computer.
To complete this procedure, you must be logged in as an
administrator.
1 Ensure that your machine and the
computer are turned on and connected,
and then insert the
"
Software DVD-ROM
"
into the computer.
2 Click [
Run Setup.exe
] after [
AutoPlay
]
is displayed.
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
3
Select the language and then click [
Next
].
4 Select the device of your machine, and
then click [Next].
5 Read the license agreement and then
click [I Agree].
6
Read the "Environmental advice for Users"
and click [
Next
].
7
Select the checkbox for the printer driver
and fax driver you wish to install, and click
the Install bunch button.
Memo
By factory default, [PCL driver], [Scanner driver],
and [ActKey] are selected.
All drivers and software packages are installed by the
collective installation if their boxes are checked. If you
wish to install drivers and software separately, click
the Install button on their right and follow the on-
screen instructions.
8 If the [Windows Security] dialog box
appears, click [Install this driver
software anyway].
9 Click the [Network] button.
The device search starts.
-
If the machine is detected, it is automatically
installed. Proceed to step 11.
- If the machine is not detected, the
[Review your installation settings.]
screen is displayed. Proceed to step 10.
10 click [Restart search] to restart the
device search.
After the machine is displayed, select the machine
and click [Next].
Connecting to a Computer
-55-
Setup
1
Memo
If the machine is not displayed by clicking [Restart
search], select [Printer name/IP Address] and
enter the IP address assigned to your machine, and
then click [Next].
11 If the [Windows Security] dialog box
appears, click [Install this driver
software anyway].
12 Click the [Exit] button.
13 Remove the "Software DVD-ROM" from
the computer.
The installation is complete.
Print a test page to check that the printer
driver is successfully installed on the
computer.
1 Click [Start] > [Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printer properties] (> a desired
printer driver if you have installed
multiple drivers) from the pop-up menu.
3 On the [General] tab, click [Print Test
Page].
Installing a Printer Driver
(For Mac OS X)
To complete the network connection with a Mac
operating system, install a printer driver on the
computer and set your machine as a network
printer.
Select the protocol for your network connection
from the following:
EtherTalk
Bonjour
Note
EtherTalk is not supported in Mac OS X 10.6 or later.
Disable the anti-virus software before starting this
procedure.
EtherTalk is not supported in Mac PCL.
Using EtherTalk (For Mac OS X
10.5)
When connecting to the network with EtherTalk,
it is necessary to enable EtherTalk in the
machine. Then, install the driver in the computer.
First, enable EtherTalk in the machine.
1 Ensure that your machine and the
computer are turned on and connected.
Reference
"Connecting an Ethernet Cable" P. 47
2 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
3 Press the to select [Admin Setup],
and press .
4 Enter the administrator password.
The factory default password is "aaaaaa".
5 Select [Complete], and press .
6 Press the to select [Network Menu],
and press .
7 Press the to select [Network Setup],
and press .
8 Press the to select [EtherTalk], and
press .
9 Press the to select [Enable], and
press .
10 Press the until the top screen is
displayed.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Connecting to a Computer
-56-
Next, install the driver in the computer.
1 Insert the "Software DVD-ROM" into the
computer.
2 Double-click the [OKI] icon on the
desktop.
3 Double-click [Driver] > [Printer] >
[Installer for OS X 10.5-10.8].
4 Enter the administrator password, and
then click [OK].
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to
complete the installation.
5 From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
6 Click [Print & Fax].
7 Click [+].
8 Click [AppleTalk].
9 Select the name of your machine and
then check that [OKI MB491(PS)] is
displayed in [Print Using].
10 Click [Add].
11 Check that your machine is displayed in
[Printers] and [OKI MB491(PS)] is
displayed in [Kind].
Note
If [OKI MB491(PS)] is not correctly displayed in
[Kind], click [-] to remove your machine from [Print
& Fax] and then redo the procedure from steps 7 to
10.
12 Close [Print & Fax].
13 Remove "Software DVD-ROM" from the
computer.
The installation is complete.
Connecting to a Computer
-57-
Setup
1
Using EtherTalk
(For Mac OS X 10.4.0 to 10.4.11)
When connecting to the network with EtherTalk,
it is necessary to enable EtherTalk in the
machine. Then, install the driver in the computer.
Memo
The following procedure uses Mac OS X 10.4.11 as an
example. Depending on an OS, the description may be
different.
First, enable EtherTalk in the machine.
1 Ensure that your machine and the
computer are turned on and connected.
Reference
"Connecting an Ethernet Cable" P. 47
2 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
3 Press the to select [Admin Setup],
and press .
4 Enter the administrator password.
The factory default password is "aaaaaa".
5 Select [Complete], and press .
6 Press the to select [Network Menu],
and press .
7 Press the to select [Network Setup],
and press .
8 Press the to select [EtherTalk], and
press .
9 Press the to select [Enable], and
press .
10 Press the until the top screen is
displayed.
Next, install the driver in the computer.
1 From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
2 Select [Network].
3 Select [Network Port Configurations]
from [Show], and then check that
[Built-in Ethernet] is selected.
4 Select [Built-in Ethernet] from [Show]
and select the [AppleTalk] tab, and
then check that [Make AppleTalk
Active] is selected.
5 Close [Network].
6 Insert "Software DVD-ROM" in the
computer.
7 Double-click the [OKI] icon on the
desktop.
8
Double-click [
Driver
] folder > [
PS
] Or
[
PCL
] folder > [
Installer for OS X 10.4
].
9 Enter the administrator password, and
then click [OK].
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to
complete the installation.
10 From the [Go] menu, select [Utilities]
and then double-click [Printer Setup
Utility].
Note
If [Printer Setup Utility] is already running, close it
and open it again.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Connecting to a Computer
-58-
11 Click [Add].
If the [You have no printers available] dialog
box appears, click [Add].
12 Select the name of your machine whose
[Connection] is [AppleTalk], and then
check that [OKI MB491(PS)] is
displayed in [Print Using].
13 Click [Add].
14 Check that the name of your machine is
displayed in [Printer List], and then
close the window.
15 From the [Go] menu, select
[Applications] and then double-click
[TextEdit].
16 Select the [File] menu > [Page Setup].
17 Select the name of your machine from
[Format for].
18 Check that the [OKI MB491(PS)] is
displayed correctly under [Format for].
19 Click [OK].
20 Remove "Software DVD-ROM" from the
computer.
The installation is complete.
Using Bonjour
(For Mac OS X 10.5 to 10.8)
Then, install the driver in the computer and set
the machine as a network printer.
Install the driver in the computer.
1 Ensure that your machine and the
computer are turned on and connected.
Reference
"Connecting an Ethernet Cable" P. 47
2 Insert "Software DVD-ROM" into the
computer.
3 Double-click the [OKI] icon on the
desktop.
4 Double-click [Driver] folder > [PS] or
[PCL] folder > [Installer for OS X
10.5-10.8].
5 Enter the administrator password, and
then click [OK].
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to
complete the installation.
6 From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
7 Click [Print & Scan] (For Mac OS X 10.5
and 10.6:[Print & Fax]).
8 Click [+].
Connecting to a Computer
-59-
Setup
1
9 Click [Default].
10 Select the name of your machine whose
[Kind] is [Bonjour], and then check
that [OKI MB491(PS)] or [OKI
MB491(PCL)] is displayed in [Print
Using].
The name of your machine is displayed with the
format of "OKI-MB491- (the last six digits of the
MAC address)".
11 Click [Add].
12 If the [Installable Options] window is
displayed, click [Continue].
If you have installed the optional second tray unit
before the driver installation, configure each item
and then click [Continue].
13 Check that your machine is displayed in
[Printers] and [OKI MB491(PS)] or
[OKI MB491(PCL)] is displayed in
[Kind].
Note
If [OKI MB491(PS)] or [OKI MB491(PCL)] is not
correctly displayed in [Kind], click [-] to remove your
machine from [Print & Fax] and then Redo the
procedure from step 8 to 12.
14 Close [Print & Scan] (For Mac OS X
10.5 and 10.6:[Print & Fax]).
15 Remove "Software DVD-ROM" from the
computer.
The installation is complete.
Using Bonjour (for Mac OS X 10.4.0
to 10.4.11)
Install the driver in the computer and set the
machine as a network printer.
Memo
The following procedure uses Mac OS X 10.4.11 as an
example. Depending on an OS, the description may be
different.
Install the driver in the computer.
1 Ensure that your machine and the
computer are turned on and connected.
Reference
"Connecting an Ethernet Cable" P. 47
2 From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
3 Select [Network].
4 Select [Network Port Configurations]
from [Show], and then check that
[Built-in Ethernet] is selected.
5 Close [Network].
6 Insert "Software DVD-ROM" into the
computer.
7 Double-click the [OKI] icon on the
desktop.
Connecting to a Computer
-60-
8 Double-click [Driver] folder > [PS] or
[PCL] folder [Installer for OS X 10.4].
9 Enter the administrator password, and
then click [OK].
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to
complete the installation.
10 From the [Go] menu, select [Utilities]
and then double-click [Printer Setup
Utility].
Note
If [Printer Setup Utility] is already running, close it
and open it again.
11 Click [Add].
If the [You have no printers available] dialog
box appears, click [Add].
12 Select the name of your machine whose
[Connection] is [Bonjour], and then
check that [OKI MB491(PS)] or [OKI
MB491(PCL)] is displayed in [Print
Using].
The name of your machine is displayed with the
format of "OKI-MB491- (the last six digits of the
MAC address)".
13 Click [Add].
14 If the [Installable Options] window is
displayed, click [Continue].
If you have installed the optional second tray unit
before the driver installation, configure each item
and then click [Continue].
15 Check that the name of your machine is
displayed in [Printer List], and then
close the window.
16 From the [Go] menu, select
[Applications] > [TextEdit].
17 Select the [File] menu > [Page setup].
18 Select the name of your machine from
[Format for].
19 Check that [OKI MB491(PS)] or [OKI
MB491(PCL)] is displayed correctly
under [Format for].
20 Click [OK].
21 Remove "Software DVD-ROM" from the
computer.
The installation is complete.
USB Connection
Perform the following procedure to connect your
machine to a computer via USB.
Connecting a USB Cable
1
Prepare a USB cable.
A USB cable is not supplied with your machine.
Prepare an USB 2.0 cable separately.
Memo
Use a USB 2.0 Hi-Speed cable for a USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
connection.
Connecting to a Computer
-61-
Setup
1
2 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power and the
computer.
Reference
"Turning Off Your Machine" P. 20
3 Plug one end of the USB cable into the
USB interface connector on the back of
the machine.
4 Plug the other end of the USB cable into
the computer's USB interface connector.
Note
For Windows OSs, do not plug the other end of the
USB cable into the computer until prompted during
driver installation.
Do not plug the USB cable into the network interface
connection. Doing so may damage your machine.
Installing a Printer and Fax Driver
(For Windows)
Note
You must be logged in as an administrator to complete this
procedure.
1 Ensure that your machine is turned off
and the USB cable is unplugged from the
computer.
2 Turn on the computer.
3 Insert "Software DVD-ROM" into the
computer.
4 Click [Run setup.exe] after [Auto
Play] is displayed.
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
5 Select the language and then click
[Next].
6 Select the device of your machine, and
then click [Next].
7 Read the license agreement and then
click [I Agree].
8 Read the "Environmental advice for
Users" and click [Next].
2
Connecting to a Computer
-62-
9 Select the checkbox of the printer driver,
fax driver or both you want to install, and
click the Install bunch button.
Memo
By factory default, [PCL driver], [Scanner driver],
and [ActKey] are selected.
All of drivers and software packages are installed by
the collective installation if their boxes are checked. If
you wish to install drivers and software separately,
click the Install button at the right to them and follow
the on-screen instructions.
10 If the [Windows Security] dialog box
appears, click [Install this driver
software anyway].
11 When the instruction prompting to
connect the machine to the computer
and turn on the machine appears, plug
the other end of the USB cable into the
computer’s USB interface connector and
turn on your machine.
Note
Do not plug the USB cable into the network interface
connection. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
12 Click the [Exit] button.
13 Remove "Software DVD-ROM" from the
computer.
The installation is complete.
Print a test page to check that the printer
driver is successfully installed on the
computer.
1 Click [Start] > [Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printer properties] (> a desired
printer driver if you have installed
multiple drivers) from the pop-up menu.
3 On the [General] tab, click [Print Test
Page].
Installing a Printer Driver
(For Mac OS X)
Note
Disable the anti-virus software before starting this
procedure.
For Mac OS X 10.5 to 10.8
1 Ensure that your machine and the
computer are turned on and connected.
Reference
"Connecting a USB Cable" P. 60
2 Insert "Software DVD-ROM" into the
computer.
3 Double-click the [OKI] icon on the
desktop.
4
Double-click [
Driver
] folder > [
PS
] or [
PCL
]
folder [
Installer for OS X 10.5-10.8
].
5 Enter the administrator password, and
then click [OK].
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to
complete the installation.
6 From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
7 Click [Print & Scan] (Mac OS X 10.5 and
10.6:[Print & Fax]).
Connecting to a Computer
-63-
Setup
1
8 Click [+].
Note
If the machine is already shown in [Printers], select
your machine, and click on [-] to delete. After this,
click [+].
9 Select the name of your machine whose
[Connection] is [USB], and then check
that [OKI MB491(PS)] or [OKI
MB491(PCL)] is displayed in [Print
Using].
10 Click [Add].
11 Check that the name of your machine is
displayed in [Printers] and [OKI
MB491(PS)] or [OKI MB491(PCL)] is
displayed.
Note
If [OKI MB491(PS)] or [OKI MB491(PCL)] is not
correctly displayed, click [-] to remove your machine
from [Printers] and then redo the procedure from
steps 8 to 10.
12 Close [Print & Scan](Mac OS X 10.5
and 10.6:[Print & Fax]).
13 Remove "Software DVD-ROM" from the
computer.
The installation is complete.
For Mac OS X 10.4.0 to 10.4.11
Memo
The procedure below uses Mac OS X 10.4.11 as an
example. Depending on your OS, the description may be
different.
1 Ensure that your machine and the
computer are turned on and connected.
Reference
"Connecting a USB Cable" P. 60
2 Insert "Software DVD-ROM".
3 Double-click the [OKI] icon on the
desktop.
4
Double-click [
Driver
] folder > [
PS
] or
[
PCL
] folder > [
Installer for OS X 10.4
].
5 Enter the administrator password, and
then click [OK].
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to
complete the installation.
6 From the [Go] menu, select [Utilities],
and then double-click [Printer Setup
Utility].
Note
If [Printer Setup Utility] is already running, close it
and open it again.
7 Click [Add].
If the [You have no printers available] dialog
box appears, click [Add].
Note
If the name of your machine whose [connection] is
[USB] is already displayed, select it and click
[Delete], and then click [Add].
Connecting to a Computer
-64-
8 Select the name of your machine whose
[Connection] is [USB], and then check
that [OKI MB491(PS)] or [OKI
MB491(PCL)] is displayed in [Print
Using].
9 Click [Add].
10 Check that the name of your machine is
displayed in [Printer List], and then
close the window.
11 Remove "Software DVD-ROM" from the
computer.
The installation is complete.
Configuring the Network Settings
-65-
Setup
1
Configuring the Network Settings
This section describes the setup required for using Scan To E-mail, Scan To Network PC, Scan To Fax
Server, Internet Fax functions.
The above functions enable you to send scanned data to a computer via the network connection. To use
them, you need to set up your machine and the computer to which you want to send scanned data.
First check the settings of the computer and fill in the information in the [
User Value
] column of the Setup
Information Form below. Then, configure your machine and the computer using the information in [
User Value
].
Reference
Be sure to configure the network connection before performing the procedures below. For the network connection, refer to
"Network Connection" P. 47.
Setup Information Form
No. Item Outline Introduction Example
User Value
*You can look at the following
page and write memos here
on the details you have
checked or the settings you
have configured.
Common Setup Information
A-1 Administrator pass-
word for your machine
The password you use to change the
machine's system settings
aaaaaa
A-2 IP address of your
machine
The IP address allocated to your machine 192.168.0.2
A-3 DNS server address DNS server address 192.168.0.1
Setup Information Required for Scan To E-mail, Scan To Fax Server and Internet Fax
B-1 E-mail address for
your machine
The e-mail address used when sending e-
mails from the machine
mb491@test.
com
(Up to 80 characters)
B-2 SMTP server address The address of the server used when
sending e-mails
smtp.test.com
B-3 POP3 server address The address of the server used when
receiving e-mails
pop3.test.com
B-4 Authentication
method
Sending mail server authentication SMTP
B-5 SMTP user ID Sending mail server account name OKIMB491
B-6 SMTP password Sending mail server password okimb491
B-7 POP user ID Receiving mail server account name user
B-8 POP password Receiving mail server password okimb491
B-9 Name of the e-mail
destination
The name of the recipient to whom you
are sending a scan-to-mail/Internet fax
from the machine
User
B-10 E-mail address of the
e-mail destination
The e-mail address of the recipient to
whom you are sending a scan-to-mail/
Internet fax from the machine
user@test.com
Setup Information Required for Scan To Network PC
C-1 Name of the destina-
tion computer
The name of the computer to which you
are forwarding scanned data
PC1
C-2 User name to log into
the destination com-
puter
User name to log in to the computer to
which you are forwarding scanned data
mb491
(Up to 32 characters)
C-3 Password to log into
the destination com-
puter
Password to log in to the computer to
which you are forwarding scanned data
mb491
(Up to 32 characters)
C-4 Profile name to regis-
ter the settings
Name when registering the machine
settings
Sales
(Up to 16 characters)
C-5 Shared folder name
on the destination
computer
Folder name of the computer to which
you are forwarding scanned data
SalesDev
(Up to 64 characters)
C-6 File name of the
scanned data
Scanned data folder name ScanData
(Up to 64 characters)
Configuring the Network Settings
-66-
Checking the Common Setup
Information
Check the common setup information for Scan To
E-mail, Scan To Network PC, Scan To Fax Server
and Internet Fax, and fill in the corresponding
columns of the Setup Information Form.
Administrator Password for Your
Machine
Enter the administrator password of your
machine in A-1 of the Setup Information Form.
If you are not the administrator of the machine,
ask the administrator the password.
Memo
Passwords are case-sensitive.
The administrator password is set to "aaaaaa" as the
factory default setting.
Gateway address/DNS server
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Check that [Reports] is selected and
press .
3 Check that [Configuration] is selected
and press .
4 On the confirmation screen press or ,
select [Yes], and press .
5 Enter the address written on the gateway
address line at the bottom right of page
3 of the printed configuration into A-2 on
the setting information sheet.
6 Enter the address written on the DNS
server (primary) line on the bottom right
of the same page into A-3.
It is necessary that the gateway address be configured
beforehand. Also, if using an Internet service provider, it is
necessary that the DNS server be configured. If it has not
been configured (0.0.0.0), follow the procedure on
55 page to configure it.
Setting Up Scan To E-mail and
Internet Fax
The Scan To E-mail, Scan To Fax Server and
Internet Fax functions enable you to send
scanned images as an attached file of an e-mail
to the specified e-mail address on the network.
To use these functions, set up the e-mail setting
for your machine.
When using Auto Delivery or Transmission Data
Save function (MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb only), the following
setup is required.
Checking the E-mail Settings of the
Computer
Note
If a network administrator specifies the values such as a
mail server account, password and e-mail address for your
machine, enter them in the Setup Information Form.
Memo
The procedure below uses Windows Live Mail on Windows
7. If you are using different mail software, refer to the
manual for the e-mail software.
1 Click [Start] and select [Windows Live
Mail].
2 Select the [Tools] menu > [Accounts].
If the menu bar is not displayed, click the
[Menus] icon and then select [Show menu bar].
3 Select the mail account and then click
[Properties].
OK
OK
OK
Configuring the Network Settings
-67-
Setup
1
4 On the [General] tab, enter the contents
of [Name] and [E-mail address] in B-9
and B-10 of the Setup Information Form.
5 Click the [Servers] tab, and then note
each setting in the corresponding
columns of the Setup Information Form.
- If there is a check in the [My server requires
authentication] checkbox, enter "SMTP" into B-4
and follow procedure 6.
- If there is no check in the [My server requires
authentication] checkbox, enter [POP or not
yet authenticated] in B-4. At this point the
confirmation of e-mail settings is complete.
If using an Internet service provider, enter [POP].
6 Click [Settings].
7 Check the login information on the
[Outgoing Mail Server] dialog.
-If [Use same settings as my incoming mail
server] is selected, enter the same values as B-7
and B-8 on B-5 and B-6.
-If [Log on using] is selected, note the content of
[Accountname] and [Password] in B-5 and B-
6, respectively.
Setting the E-mail Address for Your
Machine
When sending data scanned from the machine by
e-mail, the e-mail address for the machine is
necessary.According to the following procedure,
set the e-mail address of the machine and enter
an e-mail address to be used by your machine in
B-1 of the Setup Information Form.
If the e-mail address for your machine is specified
by the network administrator, enter the e-mail
address in B-1.
If you are using an Internet service provider, obtain
an e
-mail address for your machine from the
provider and then enter the e
-mail address in B-1.
If the e
-mail address for your machine is neither
specified nor obtained, determine the e
-mail
address according to the value you entered in B-4
(authentication method):
- If B-4 is "SMTP", determine an e
-mail address and
enter it in B-1.
- B-4 is "POP", enter the same e
-mail address as B-
10 in B-1.
Note
If you want your machine to receive e-mail, you must
obtain an e-mail address for your machine from a network
administrator or your Internet service provider.
Configuring Your Machine for Scan To
E-mail, Scan To Fax Server and Internet Fax
Set up your machine for Scan To E-mail and
Internet Fax using the information in the Setup
Information Form.
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Easy Setup] and
press .
3 Enter the administrator password (A-1).
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [E-mail Setting]
and then press the .
6 Press the and then enter the
information in B-2.
B-9
B-10
B-3
B-2
B-7
B-8
OK
OK
Configuring the Network Settings
-68-
7 Select [Enter] and then press .
8 Press the and then enter the
information in B-1.
9 Select [Enter] and then press .
10 Press the and then select a protocol
for receiving e-mail for the machine, and
then press .
- If you want your machine to receive e-mail from
the POP3 server, select [POP3]. Proceed to step
11.
- If you want your machine to receive e-mail
without using a mail server, select [SMTP].
Proceed to step 13.
- If you do not want your machine to receive e-mail,
select [Disable]. Proceed to step 13.
11 Press the and then enter the
information in B-3.
12 Select [Enter] and then press .
13 Press the and then select an
authentication method based on the
information in B-4. Then, press .
- If B-4 is "Do not authenticate", select [Do not
authenticate]. Proceed to step 24.
- If B-4 is "SMTP", select [SMTP Auth]. Proceed to
step 14.
- If B-4 is "POP", select [POP Before SMTP].
Proceed to step 18.
14 Press the and then enter the
information in B-5.
15 Select [Enter] and then press .
16 Press the and then enter the
information in B-6.
17 Select [Enter] and then press .
Proceed to step 24.
18 Press the and then enter the
information in B-3.
19 Select [Enter] and then press .
20 Press the and then enter the
information in B-7.
21 Select [Enter] and then press .
22 Press the and then enter the
information in B-8.
23 Select [Enter] and then press .
24 When the setup menu screen is
displayed, press .
The setup for Scan To E-mail, Scan To Fax Server
and Internet Fax is complete.
Reference
For details on how to use Scan To E-mail, refer to "Scan to
E-mail" P. 109.
For details on how to use Scan To Fax Server, refer to
"Basic Procedure for Scan To Fax Server" P. 98.
For details on how to use Internet Fax, refer to "Basic
Procedure for Internet Faxing" P. 100.
Setting Up Scan To Network
PC
The Scan To Network PC function enables you to
send and save scanned images to the "shared
folder" of a computer on the network. To use this
function, register your machine on the computer
as a user and create a shared folder, and then
create a profile on your machine to register the
settings for the computer.
Note
Before starting the setup, get permission from the network
administrator to create a shared folder on the computer by
following the procedure below.
Memo
The CIFS protocol is used in this procedure.
Checking the Name of the Computer
Check the name of the computer following the
procedure below, and fill in C-1 of the Setup
Information Form.
For Windows 7, Windows Server
2008 R2, Windows Server 2008
and Vista
1 Click [Start] and select [Control
Panel].
2 Select [System and Security].
For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista,
select [System and Maintenance].
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Configuring the Network Settings
-69-
Setup
1
3 Select [See the name of this
computer] under [System].
4 Enter the name in [Computer name] in
C-1 of the Setup Information Form.
5 Close the window.
For Windows Server 2003 and
Windows XP
1
click [start] > [Control Panel] >
[Performance and Maintenance] >
[System].
For Windows Server 2003, click [Start] >
[Operator panel] > [System].
2 Select the [Computer Name] tab and
then click [Change].
3 Enter the name in [Computer Name] in
C-1 of the Setup Information Form.
4 Click [Cancel] to close the window.
For Mac OS X
1 From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
2 Click [Sharing].
3 Enter the name in [Computer Name] in
C-1 of the Setup Information Form.
Memo
If the computer name is over 16 characters, for Mac OS X
10.4.11 enter the first 15 characters in C-1. For Mac OS X
10.5-10.6, select the network service you are using from
[System Environment Settings] > [Network], and
enter the NetBios field name into C-1 within WINS in
Detailed Settings.
4 Close [Sharing].
Determining the Names of the Items
Required for Scan To Network PC
Determine the names of the following items and
fill in C-2 to C-6 on the Setup Information Form.
User name to log into the destination computer (C-2)
Note
If the username is managed on the domain, enter
"Username@Domainname" in C-2. To check the
domain name, click on [Change] within the
[Computer Name] tab in the [System Properties]
dialogue box.
Password to log into the destination computer (C-3)
Profile name to register the settings on your
machine (C-4)
Shared folder name on the destination computer
(C-5)
File name of the scanned data (C-6)
Configuring the Computer for Scan
To Network PC
With the setup information form, create an
account and shared folder for the machine in the
computer.
Memo
If the computer is in a domain, the procedure for adding a
user account may be different to the procedure below.
Refer to the Microsoft Windows manual.
For Windows 7, Windows Server
2008 R2, Windows 2008 and Win-
dows Vista
1
Click [Start] > [Control Panel].
2 Select [Add or remove user
accounts].
3 Select [Create a new account].
C-1
C-1
Configuring the Network Settings
-70-
4 Enter the information in C-2 in the text
box.
5 Ensure that [Standard user] is
selected, and then click [Create
Account].
6 Click the icon of the user account created
in step 5.
7 Select [Create a password].
8 Enter the information in C-3 in [New
password] and [Confirm new
password], and then click [Create
password].
9 Close the operator panel.
10 Create a new folder on the computer
with the name entered in C-5.
Memo
It is recommended to create a folder in the local drive
(C drive or D drive), not on the desktop, [My
Documents], or network drive.
11 Right-click the folder created in step 10
and select [Properties].
12 Select the [Sharing] tab and then click
[Share].
13 Select the user account created in step 5
from the drop down box, and then click
[Add].
14 Check that the user added in step 13 is
displayed and then click [Share].
After the [Network discovery and file sharing]
dialog box is displayed, click [No, make the
network that I am connected to a private
network].
15 Click [Done].
16 Click [Advanced Sharing] on the
[Sharing] tab.
17 Click [Permissions].
For Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, proceed
to step 20.
Configuring the Network Settings
-71-
Setup
1
18 Click [Add].
19 Enter the value in C-2 in the entry field
and then click [OK].
20 Select the user added in step 13 and
select the [Allow] check box for [Full
Control], and then click [OK].
21 click [OK].
22 Click [Close].
Proceed to "Creating a Profile for Scan To Network
PC" P. 76.
For Windows XP
1
Click [start] > [Control Panel].
2 Double-click [User Accounts].
3 Select [Create a new account].
4 Enter the value of C-2 in the text box and
click [Next].
5 Select [Limited] and click [Create
Account].
6 Click the icon of the user account created
in step 5.
7 Select [Create a password].
8 Enter the value of C-3 in [Type a new
password] and [Type the new
password again to confirm], and then
click [Create Password].
9 Close the operator panel.
10 Create a new folder on the computer
with the name entered in C-5.
Memo
It is recommended to create a folder in the local drive
(C drive or D drive), not on the desktop, [My
Documents], or network drive.
11 Right-click the folder created in step 10,
and then select [Sharing and
Security].
Configuring the Network Settings
-72-
12 Click [If you understand the security
risks but want to share files without
running the wizard, click here.].
If the screen below appears, select [Share this
folder] and click [Permissions]. Proceed to step
15.
13 Select [Just enable file sharing] in
Windows Firewall, and then click [OK].
14 Select the [Share this folder on the
network] and [Allow network users
to change my files] check box, and
then click [OK].
Proceed to "Creating a Profile for Scan To Network
PC" P. 76
15 Click [Add].
16 Enter the value in C-2 in the entry field
and click [OK].
17 Select the [Allow] check box for [Full
Control], and then click [OK].
Proceed to "Creating a Profile for Scan To Network
PC" P. 76
Configuring the Network Settings
-73-
Setup
1
For Windows Server 2003
Memo
The items here may differ depending on the edition you
are using.
1 Click [Start] > [Administrative Tools] >
[Computer Management].
2 In the right window, double-click
[System Tools] > [Local Users and
Groups], and then Right-click [Users]
and select [New User].
3 Enter the value of C-2 in [User name]
and the value of C-3 in [Password] and
[Confirm password].
4 Select [User cannot change
password] and [Password never
expires], and then click [Create].
Memo
If [User must change password at next logon] is
selected, clear it so that you can select [User can not
change password] and [Password never expires].
5 Click [Close].
6 Double-click [User] and check that the
user created in step 4 is displayed.
7 Close the window.
8 Create a new folder on the computer
with the name entered in C-5.
Memo
It is recommended to create a folder in the local drive
(C drive or D drive), not on the desktop, [My
Documents], or network drive.
9 Right-click the folder created in step 8
and then select [Sharing].
10 Select [Share this folder] and then
click [Permissions].
11 Click [Add].
12 Enter the value in C-2 in the entry field
and click [OK].
Proceed to step 15.
13 Select the [Allow] check box for [Full
Control], and then click [OK].
14 Ensure that the icon of the shared folder
created in step 8 changes into the icon
with a hand, and then close the window.
"Creating a Profile for Scan To Network PC" P. 76
Configuring the Network Settings
-74-
For Mac OS X 10.5 to 10.7
1 From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
2 Click [Users & Groups] (for Mac OS X
10.5 and 10.6: [Accounts]).
3 Click [Click the lock to make
changes.] at the bottom left of the
screen and enter the administrator
password. Then, click [Unlock] (for Mac
OS X 10.5 and 10.6: [OK]).
4 Click [+].
5 Select [Standard] from [New
Account].
6 Enter the value of C-2 in [Name].
For Mac OS X 10.5, enter the value of C-2 in
[Name].
7 Enter the value in C-3 in both
[Password] and [Verify].
8 Click [Create User] (for Mac OS X 10.5
and 10.6: [Create Account]).
Memo
After the dialog box for auto login appears, disable the
auto login.
9 Check that an account is added to
[Other Users] (for Mac OS X 10.5 and
10.6: [Other Accounts]) with the name
of C-2, and close [Users & Groups] (for
Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6: [Accounts]) .
10 Create a new folder on the computer
with the name entered in C-5.
11 From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
12 Click [Sharing].
13 Check the check box of [File Sharing].
14 Click [+] under [Shared Folder].
15 Select the folder created in step 10 and
click [Add].
16 Select the folder added in step 15 and
click [+] under [Users].
Configuring the Network Settings
-75-
Setup
1
17 Select the account created in step 8 and
click [Select].
18 Click the triangle button at the right side
of the user added in step 17 and select
[Read & Write].
19 Click [Options].
20 Check the checkbox of [Share files and
folders using SMB (Windows)].
For Mac OS X 10.5, check the checkbox of [Share
files and folders using SMB].
21 Check the checkbox of the account
added in step 16.
22 Enter the value of C-3 in [Password]
and click [OK].
23 Click [Done].
24 Close [Sharing].
Proceed to "Creating a Profile for Scan To Network
PC" P. 76
For Mac OS X 10.4.0 to 10.4.11
Memo
The following procedure uses Mac OS X 10.4.11 as an
example. Depending on an OS, the description may be
different.
1 From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
2 Click [Accounts].
3 Click [Click the lock to make
changes.] at the bottom left of the
screen and enter the administrator
password. Then, click [OK].
4 Click [+].
5 Enter the value of C-2 in [Name].
6 Enter the value in C-3 in both
[Password] and [Verify].
7 Click [Create Account].
Memo
After the dialog box for auto login appears, disable the
auto login.
Configuring the Network Settings
-76-
8 Check that an account is added to
[Other Accounts] with the name of C-2,
and close [Accounts].
9 Create a new folder on the computer
with the name entered in C-5.
10 From the Apple menu, select [System
Preferences].
11 Click [Sharing].
12 Check the checkbox of [Windows
Sharing].
13 Click [Enable Accounts...].
14 Check the checkbox of the account
created in step 7.
15 Enter the value in C-3 in [Password]
and click [OK].
16 Click [Done].
17 Close [Sharing].
Proceed to "Creating a Profile for Scan To Network
PC".
Creating a Profile for Scan To
Network PC
Register the information on the Information form
on the computer as a profile. It is necessary to
specify the profile to send data when you
perform Scan To Network PC with the computer.
1 Press the the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Profile] and then
press .
3 Press the to select the profile number
you want to register and then press .
4 Press the to select [Register] and
then press .
5 Press to select [Profile Name] and then
press the .
6 Enter the information in C-4.
7 Select [Enter] and then press .
8 Press the to select [Target URL] and
then press .
9 Enter the value of C-1 and C-5 as "\\C-
1\C-5".
Note
If there is no DNS server on the network, you cannot
specify the computer by using the computer name
(C-1). In such a case, you can configure the settings
by using the computer's IP address.
Memo
In order to enter the "\" sign while using a QWERTY
keyboard, press <CTRL> and then press <\>.
10 Select [Enter] and then press .
11 Press the to select [User Name] and
then press .
Example: \\PC1\SalesDev
Example: \\192.168.0.3\SalesDev
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Configuring the Network Settings
-77-
Setup
1
12 Enter the information in C-2.
Note
If domain management is performed, enter
"C-2@domain name".
When carrying out domain management, if you cannot
connect even after entering "C-2@Domainname",
delete "@Domainname".
Access the machine's website again, and set the
NetBIOS domain name in [Workgroup name] within
[Admin Setup] > [Network Menu] > [NBT/
NetBEUI].
*For the domain name, please check with the network
manager.
13 Select [Enter] and then press .
14 Press the to select [Password] and
then press .
15 Enter the value of C-3.
16 Select [Enter] and then press .
17 Press the to select [File Name] and
then press .
18 Enter the information in C-6.
- By adding "#n" to the end of the file name, a
serial number is automatically assigned to the end
of the name of sent files.
- By adding "#d" to the end of the file name, a date
is automatically assigned to the end of the name
of sent files.
19 Select [Enter] and then press .
20 Configure other items if necessary.
21 Press to register the settings.
The setup for Scan To Network PC is complete.
Reference
For details how to use Scan To Network PC, refer to "Scan
to Network PC" P. 111.
Managing Profiles
To perform the Scan To Network PC, Auto
Delivery or Transmission Data Save function (for
MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb Only), a profile for each destination
must be created. You can register up to 50
profiles.
Reference
Refer to "Creating a Profile for Scan To Network PC" P. 76
Modifying a Profile
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Profile] and then
press .
3 Press the to select the profile you
want to modify and then press .
4 Press the to select [Edit] and then
press .
5 Press the to select the item you want
to modify and then press .
6 Modify the item.
7 Select [Enter] and then press .
8 If you want to modify more than one
item, repeat steps 5 and 7.
9 Press to register the settings.
Deleting a Profile
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Profile] and then
press .
3 Press the to select the profile you
want to delete and then press .
4 Press the to select [Delete] and then
press .
5 Press the or to select [Yes] on the
confirmation message and then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Printing Configuration
-78-
Printing Configuration
This section explains how to print the Configuration on which you can check the detailed information of
your machine, such as the settings and status of your machine.
Printing Procedure
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Reports] and
press .
3 Press the to select [Configuration]
and press .
4 On the confirmation message, press the
or to select [Yes] and press .
Reference
You can also print reports and lists for each function. Refer
to the User's Manual Advanced.
OK
OK
OK
-79-
Copying
2
2. Copying
This chapter explains the basic operation and settings for your machine's copy function.
Basic Operation
This section explains how to start and cancel copy jobs.
Starting a Copy Job
1 Press the <COPY> key on the operator
panel to open the copy standby screen.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Configure the copy settings if necessary.
4 Enter the number of copies using the
ten-key pad.
- You can enter up 1 to 99 sets.
- If you have entered an incorrect value, press the
<CLEAR> key and then enter the correct value.
5 Press to start copying.
Reference
For details on how to configure each copy setting, refer to
"Configuring Copy Settings" P. 80.
For details on how to load your documents in the ADF or on
the document glass, refer to "Loading Documents" P. 38.
Canceling a Copy Job in
Progress
You can cancel copying until the message
showing the copy completion is displayed.
1 Press the <STOP> key on the operator
panel.
Note
When you make a copy with the document glass, do not
apply an excessive load to the document glass.
MONO
Configuring Copy Settings
-80-
Configuring Copy Settings
You can change the copy settings to alter the output to suit your needs. Each setting can be configured
from the [Change Settings] menu on the copy standby screen.
Perform the following procedures at step 3 of "Starting a Copy Job" P. 79 described above.
Reference
The changes made in the [Change Settings] menu on the copy standby screen are temporary. You can change the default
settings by configuring [Admin Setup] from the <SETTING> key. For details, refer to the User's Manual Advanced.
Changing the Scan Size (Scan Size)
You can select the appropriate size of the
document to be scanned.
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
2 Check that [Scan Size] is selected and
then press .
3 Press the to select a scan size and
then press .
4 Press the until the start screen is displayed.
If you select the scan size of less than or equal to
177.8mm (7 inches) wide, and make copies from ADF,
Scan Resolution is changed to High Quality automatically.
Changing the Paper Tray
(Paper Feed)
You can select the size of the document to be copied.
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
2 Press the to select [Paper Feed] and
then press .
3 Press the to select a tray and then
press .
4 Press the until the start screen is displayed.
Memo
[Tray 2] is displayed only when the optional second tray
unit is installed.
When set to [Auto], the MP tray is not selected in the
default setting. To use the MP tray, press the <SETTING>
key and select [Paper Setup] > [Select Tray] > [Copy] >
[MP tray], and then select [ON] or [ON (Prior)].
When set to [Auto], the paper tray that holds paper other
than A4, B5, A5, A6, letter, legal 13/13.5/14, or executive
is not selected. To use a different paper size, select the
desired paper tray in the [Paper Feed Tray] setting.
Copying Using the MP Tray
If you have selected [MP Tray], you can copy your
documents onto the paper loaded in the MP tray.
1 Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
2 Load the paper in the MP tray.
3 Press .
Settable Values:
A4* A5 A6 B5 Letter Legal 13
Legal 13.5 Legal 14 Executive
*indicates the factory default.
OK
OK
OK
Settable Values:
Auto* Tray 1 Tray 2 MP Tray**
*indicates the factory default.
**Not displayed in MB441,
MB461, MB461+LP and
ES4161 MFP.
OK
MONO
Configuring Copy Settings
-81-
Copying
2
4 When the pop-up message is displayed,
press the or to select [Start] and
then press .
Reference
For details on how to load the paper in the MP tray, refer to
"Loading Paper on the MP Tray (MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)" P. 34.
Changing Image Orientation
of Document (Direction)
You can select [Portrait] or [Landscape] for the
document's orientation. Specify an appropriate
orientation to get the copy result you want.
Reference
For details on how to load documents in each orientation,
refer to "Loading Documents" P. 38.
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
2 Press the to select [Direction] and
then press .
3 Press the to select the orientation of a
document and then press .
4 Press the until the start screen is
displayed.
Making Enlarged or Reduced
Copies (Zoom)
You can make enlarged or reduced copies by
setting [Zoom]. You can set the zoom ratio in
the following three ways:
Using [Auto]
Selecting a preset zoom ratio
Setting the zoom ratio using the ten-key pad
Using [Auto]
By selecting [Auto], the zoom ratio is
automatically determined according to the
selected scan size and paper tray.
Note
You can use [Auto] only when copying on A4, A5, A6, B5
letter, legal 13/13.5/14, and executive paper.
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
2 Press the to select [Zoom] and then
press .
3 Press the to select [Auto] and then
press .
4 Press the until the start screen is
displayed.
Memo
Setting the [Paper Tray] to [Automatic] will
automatically set [Enlarge/Reduce] to [100%]. When
selecting another scaling factor, initially set [Paper Tray],
and then set [Enlarge/Reduce].
Selecting a Preset Zoom Ratio
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
2 Press the to select [Zoom] and then
press .
3 Press the to select the desired value
and then press .
Memo
By selecting [Fit to page(98%)], if the sizes of the
document and the paper are the same, the document
is reduced to fit onto the paper.
Settable Values:
Portrait* Landscape
*indicates the factory default.
OK
OK
OK
Values:
100%* A4->A5(70%)
Leg14->Let(78%) Leg13.5->Let(81%)
Leg13->Let(84%) A4->B5(86%)
A4->Let(94%) Let->A4(97%)
Fit to page(98%) B5->A4(115%)
A5->A4(141%)
*indicates the factory default.
OK
OK
OK
OK
Configuring Copy Settings
-82-
4 Press the until the start screen is
displayed.
When [Paper Feed] is set to [Auto], some values cannot
be selected. The selectable values differ according to the
selected scan size.
With some ratios, parts of the document's image may be
missing or margins may appear on the copied outputs.
Memo
When [Paper Feed] is set to [Auto], the paper tray is
automatically selected according to the selected zoom
ratio. If you want to use a specific paper tray, reconfigure
the [Paper Feed] setting.
A paper tray that holds paper other than A4, B5, A5, A6,
letter, legal 13/13.5/14, or executive is not selected even if
[Paper Feed] is set to [Auto]. To select the desired paper
tray, reconfigure the [Paper Feed] setting.
Setting the Zoom Ratio Using the
ten-key pad
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
2 Press the to select [Zoom] and then
press .
3 Press the to select [Zoom
(25~400%)] and then press .
4 Enter the zoom ratio from 25 to 400%
using the ten-key pad and then press .
- You can set the ratio in 1% increments.
- If you have entered an incorrect value, press the
<CLEAR> key and then enter the correct value.
5 Press the until the start screen is
displayed.
Enabling Continuous Scan Mode
(Continuous Scan)
If you want to copy multiple sets of documents
as a single copy job, enable the continuous scan
mode. It is useful when using [Sort], [N-in-1],
or [Duplex Copy] functions.
Memo
Continuous Scan Mode is also available for faxes, Internet
faxes, as well as for scan functions. You can configure
faxes from [Applied Settings], and Internet faxes and
scans from [Reading Settings].
Reference
For details on the [DuplexCopy] functions, refer to
"Making Duplex Copies (Duplex Copy)".
For details on the [Sort] and [N-in-1] functions, refer to
the User's Manual Advanced.
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
2 Press the to select [Continuous
Scan] and then press .
3 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
4 Press the until the start screen is
displayed.
Copying With Continuous Scan
Mode
With the continuous scan mode, you can copy
your documents from the ADF or document
glass, or both of them.
1 Place the first document with text face
up in the ADF or face down on the
document glass.
2 Configure the copy settings if necessary.
Change other copy settings as required.
3 Enter the number of copies with the ten-
key pad.
4 Press to start scanning the first
document.
5
When the [
Please set next document
]
screen is displayed, place the next document
in the ADF or on the document glass.
Note
When changing the place to load the next document, be
sure to remove the document from the place you used first.
6 Press the to select [Start Scan] and
then press .
7 When all sets of the documents are
scanned, press the to select [Scan
Complate] and then press .
Memo
When making N-in-1 and/or duplex copies using the
document glass, the [Please set next document] screen
is displayed after scanning the documents even if
[Continuous Scan] is set to [OFF].
For fax, Internet fax and scan functions, please follow
procedures 5-7 after the first page of the document has
started to be read.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
OK
OK
Configuring Copy Settings
-83-
Copying
2
Making Duplex Copies (Duplex
Copy)
You can copy 1-sided (simplex) and 2-sided
(duplex) documents on to one side (simplex) or
both sides (duplex) of a sheet of paper. You can
also select the binding position from either long-
edge or short-edge binding.
Specify the appropriate orientation of the
document in [Direction] beforehand to get the
copy result you want.
Use standard size plain paper for duplex copies. Using
non-standard paper may cause a paper jam in the duplex
unit of your machine.
Duplex printing cannot be done while paper is fed by
Manual Feeder in MB441, MB461, MB461+LP and ES4161
MFP.
Reference
For details on the available paper for your machine, refer
to "Loading Paper" P. 32.
For details on how to configure the [Direction] setting,
refer to "Changing Image Orientation of Document
(Direction)" P. 81.
Long-Edge Binding
Copies your document to be bound along the
long edge of the paper.
Short-Edge Binding
Copies your document to be bound along the
short edge of the paper.
Reference
To set margins for binding, refer to the User's Manual
Advanced.
Enabling Duplex Copies
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
2 Press the to select [Duplex Copy]
and then press .
3 Press the to select the desired value
and then press .
4 Press the until the start screen is
displayed.
Note
You can copy "duplex to duplex" or "duplex to simplex"
copies only when scanning the documents from the ADF.
Memo
When making duplex copies using the document glass, the
continuous scan mode is automatically enabled. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
Adjusting Copy Density
(Density)
You can adjust the copy density from 7 levels.
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
2 Press the to select [Image Settings]
and then press .
3 Check that [Density] is selected and
then press .
4 Press the or to select the desired
density and then press .
Memo
[0] is the standard value. To darken the document
image, select [+1], [+2] or [+3] (most dense).
Conversely, to lighten the document image, select
[-1], [-2] or [-3] (least dense).
5 Press the until the start screen is
displayed.
Changing Document Type
(Document Type)
You can select the document type to make copies
at the most suitable quality for your needs.
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
OK
Settable Values for Printing Method:
OFF (Simplex)*
Simplex document Duplex LE
Simplex document Duplex SE
Duplex documentDuplex printing
Duplex LE Simplex printing
Duplex SE Simplex printing
*indicates the factory default.
Settable Density Values:
+3 +2 +1 0* -1 -2 -3
*indicates the factory default.
OK
OK
OK
OK
Configuring Copy Settings
-84-
2 Press the to select [Image Settings]
and then press .
3 Press the to select [Document Type]
and then press .
4 Press the to select a document type
and then press .
Memo
[Text]: Set when copying a text document.
[Text&Photo]: Set when copying a document having
texts and photos.
Images are reproduced with a balance between texts
and photos.
[Photo]: Set when copying photos and graphic
documents.
This reproduces grayscale for images in which it is
important.
[Photo (Glossy)]: Set when copying photo
documents printed on a glossy sliver halide
photography or glossy inkjet paper.
Images are reproduced by focusing on the gray level
in consideration of the glossy.
If Photo or Photo (Glossy) is selected, Scan Resolution
is fixed to Normal.
5 Press the until the start screen is
displayed.
When selecting [Text], the gray level may be reduced on
some document.
When selecting [Photo], [Photo (Glossy)], fine texts or
lines may be blurred on some documents.
When selecting [Photo(Glossy)], images may be bright.
Adjusting the Background
Removal
You can turn off the background erasing for
documents or adjust the background density
from 6 levels.
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
2 Press the to select [Image Settings]
and then press .
3 Check that [Background Removal] is
selected and then press .
4 Press the or to select the desired
value and then press .
Memo
[3] is the standard value. To lighten the background
(base) for the document, select [4], [5] or [6].
Conversely, to darken, select [2], [1] or [OFF] (not
removal).
5 Press the until the start screen is
displayed.
Note
When lightening the setting of the background removal
fine lines, texts or light color may not be reproduced on
some documents.
Changing Scan Resolution
You can change the scan resolution of a
document.
1 Press the to enter the [Change
Settings] menu.
2 Press the to select [Image Settings]
and then press .
3 Check that [Resolution] is selected and
then press .
4 Press the or to select the desired
value and then press .
Memo
[High Speed] provides quick copy. By selecting
[Normal] or [High Quality], the reproduction and
gray level of fine lines or texts can be improved.
Note
If you select the scan size of less than or equal to
177.8mm (7 inches) wide, and make copies from ADF,
Scan Resolution is changed to High Quality automatically.
5 Press the until the start screen is
displayed.
Settable Types:
Text Text&Photo* Photo Photo (Glossy)
*indicates the factory default.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Settable Values:
OFF 1 2 3* 4 5 6
*indicates the factory default.
Settable Resolution:
High Speed* Normal High Quality
*indicates the factory default.
OK
OK
OK
OK
Configuring Copy Settings
-85-
Copying
2
Resetting Copy Settings
Auto Reset
All settings you configured for your copy job
return to their default values if no operation is
made for a set period of time. The auto reset
time is set to 3 minutes as the factory default
setting.
Reference
You can change the auto reset time by configuring [Admin
Setup] from the <SETTING> key. For details, refer to the
User's Manual Advanced.
Using the <RESET/LOG OUT> key
By pressing the <RESET/LOG OUT> key, the
settings you configured for your copy job return
to their default values.
After copying, press the <RESET/LOG OUT>
key to reset the default settings for the next
user.
-86-
3.
Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w,
MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
This chapter explains basic settings and operations for faxing, scanning to fax server and Internet faxing
and operations on managing the phone book.
Basic Procedure for Faxing
This section explains basic operations for transmitting faxes. You need to configure the initial settings
before using the fax function.
Memo
You can load only A4, letter or legal size documents in the ADF, and only A4, letter or legal (MB491+LP/MPS4700mb only) size
documents on the document glass.
You cannot load mixed size documents for faxing.
Reference
For details on initial settings for the fax function, refer to "Basic Settings for Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w,
MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)" P. 40.
Sending a Fax
Memo
The machine puts priority on the ADF when scanning
documents. Be sure not to place documents on the ADF
when you use the document glass.
1
Press the <
FAX/HOOK
> key on the
operator panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
3 Check that [Fax] is selected and press
to open the fax start screen.
4 Check that [Add Destination] is
selected on the start screen and then
press .
5 Specify a destination.
You can specify a destination from the ten-key pad, the
speed dial list, the group list, the transmission histories,
the reception histories, or the one-touch key pad.
Reference
For details on each procedure, refer to "Specifying a
Destination" P. 87.
6 Configure the advanced functions if
necessary.
Reference
"Configuring Fax Settings" P. 90
7 Press to start transmission.
When you want to scan multiple documents as a
single fax job using the document glass, enable
the continuous scan mode.
Reference
For details on the continuous scan mode, refer to "Enabling
Continuous Scan Mode (Continuous Scan)" P. 82.
Note
You cannot use the button.
If <STATUS> is pressed and is pressed twice, the
information is displayed on the display screen.
Reference
For details on how to load your documents in the ADF or on
the document glass, refer to "Loading Documents" P. 38.
When you want to specify multiple destinations, refer to
the User's Manual Advanced.
OK
OK
MONO
C
OLOR
Basic Procedure for Faxing
-87-
Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
3
When you take a copy with the document glass, do not
apply an excessive load to the document glass.
Specifying a Destination
You can specify a destination in the following six
ways:
Using the ten-key pad
Using a speed dial
Using a group
Using the transmission histories
Using the reception histories
Using the one-touch key pad
Perform the following procedures at step 5 of
"Sending a Fax" P. 86 described above.
Direct Input
You can enter a destination fax number directly
by using the ten-key pad. You can enter up to 40
digits.
1 Press the to select [Direct Input] and
then press .
2 Enter a destination fax number using the
ten-key pad on the operator panel.
3 Select [Enter] and then press .
Memo
You can use the ten-key pad to enter a destination also on
the screen that is displayed after pressing the <FAX/
HOOK> key. In this case, the fax start screen appears
after entering a destination.
Dialing Functions
You can use the following functions when
entering a destination fax number.
Select the function you want and then press on
the fax number entry screen.
-(Hyphen)
Inserts a hyphen to the entered fax number.
PreFix
Inserts a prefix number registered in advance.
"N" is inserted when entering.
Flash
Orders your PBX(Private Branch Exchange) to
connect you with PSTN(Public Switched
Telephone Network). When inputting, enter "F".
OK
OK
Basic Procedure for Faxing
-88-
Enter "Pause" and "#" by pressing <#> on the
ten-key pad. When you press <#>, you toggle
between "P" and "#".
Pause
Pauses a few seconds when dialing. You can use
multiple pauses. "P" is inserted when entering.
# (Hash symbol)
When the tone dial is set, "#" sends through a
circuit. When inputting, enter "#".
Enter "Tone" and "*" by pressing <*> on the
ten-key pad. When you press <*>, you toggle
between "T" and "*".
Tone
Switches to tone dialing if pulse dialing is set. "T"
is inserted when entering.
* (Asterisk)
When the tone dial is set, "*" sends through a
circuit. When inputting, enter "*".
Reference
For details on prefix numbers, refer to the User's Manual
Advanced.
Using Speed Dial List and Group List
You can select a destination from numbers
registered in the speed dial list or the group list.
You must register them in advance.
Reference
For details on how to register numbers to Speed Dial List
and Group List, refer to "Phone Book" P. 95.
1 Press the to select [Speed Dial List]
or [Group List] and then press .
2 Press the to select a destination or
group and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
entries.
3 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
4 Check that [Complete] is selected and
then press .
Using Transmission and Reception
History
You can select a destination from the 50 most
recent transmissions or receptions.
1 Press the to select [Tx History] or
[Rx History] and then press .
2 Press the to select an entry and then
press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
entries.
3 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
4 Check that [Complete] is selected and
then press .
Using One-Touch Key Pad
The one-touch key pad can hold fax numbers
registered in Speed Dial List.
The speed dials no.1 to 16 are automatically
registered to the one-touch key pad.
1 Press the desired one-touch key on the
start screen.
Press the <SHIFT> key to select the speed dials
no.9 to 16 assigned to the one-touch key pad.
Memo
You can use the one-touch key pad also on the screen that
is displayed after pressing the <FAX/HOOK> key. In this
case, the fax standby screen appears after pressing a one-
touch key so that you can configure other advanced
settings for fax functions.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Basic Procedure for Faxing
-89-
Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
3
Deleting Specified Destinations
1 Select the specified destination on the
fax start screen by pressing and then
press .
2 Press the to select a destination you
want to delete and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
entries.
3 When you have selected all the
destinations to be deleted, press .
4 Check that [Delete The Address] is
selected and then press .
- If all recipients have been deleted, you will be
taken back automatically to the start screen.
- If not all recipients have been deleted, press to
go back to the start screen.
OK
OK
OK
Configuring Fax Settings
-90-
Configuring Fax Settings
You can configure the fax settings to alter the output to suit your needs. Each setting can be configured
from the [Fax Functions] menu on the fax start screen.
Perform the following procedures at step 6 of "Sending a Fax" P. 86 described above.
Changing Scan Size (Scan Size)
You can select the appropriate scan size for your
document.
1 Press the to select [Fax Functions]
on the fax start screen and then press
.
2 Check that [Scan Size] is selected and
then press .
3 Press the to select a size and then
press .
4
Press the until the fax standby screen
appears.
Changing Resolution
(Resolution)
You can select an appropriate resolution to scan
your fax document to get optimum image quality.
1 Press the to select [Fax Functions]
on the fax standby screen and then
press .
2 Press the to select [Resolution] and
then press .
3 Press the to select a resolution and
then press .
Memo
[Extra-Fine] may be unavailable depending on the
recipient machine.
In the [Fine], [Extra-Fine], or [Photo] mode,
scanning takes longer.
4
Press the until the fax standby screen
appears.
Adjusting Density (Density)
You can adjust the scan density from 7 levels.
1
Press to select [
Fax Functions
] on the
fax standby screen and then press .
2 Press the to select [Density] and
then press .
3
Press the
or to select a density and
then press .
Memo
[0] is the standard value. To darken the document
image, select [+1], [+2] or [+3] (most dense).
Conversely, to lighten the document image, select
[- 1], [-2] or [-3] (least dense).
4
Press the until the fax standby screen
appears.
Printing the Sender Name
You can set the machine to print a sender name
on faxes you send. By default, the name you
specified in [Sender ID] is printed.
Reference
For details on [Sender ID], refer to "Specifying Sender
Information" P. 44.
1 Press the to select [Fax Functions]
on the fax standby screen and then
press .
2 Press the to select [TTI] and then
press .
3 Press the to select [ON] and then
press .
4
Press the
until the fax start screen
appears.
Reference
For details on how to register a sender name and change
the sender name to be used, refer to the Use's Manual
Advanced.
Settable Size Values:
A4* Letter Legal 13 Legal 13.5
Legal 14
*indicates the factory default.
Settable Resolution:
Normal* Fine Extra-Fine Photo
*indicates the factory default.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Values:
+3 +2 +1 0* -1 -2 -3
*indicates the factory default.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Checking and Canceling Fax Transmission
-91-
Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
3
Checking and Canceling Fax Transmission
This section explains how to check or cancel fax jobs.
Canceling Fax Transmission
You can cancel a job that is being transmitted as
long as the message indicating the job has been
completed has not appeared.
1 Press the <STOP> key on the operator
panel.
Canceling a Reserved Job
You can cancel reserved jobs.
1 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key on the
operator panel.
2 Check that [Fax] is selected and then
press to open the fax start screen.
3 Press the to select [Fax Job View/
Cancel] and then press .
4 Press the to select the job you want to
cancel and then press .
5 Check the job contents and then press
the .
6 Press the to select [Delete Reserved
Tx] and then press .
7 Press the or select [Yes] and then
press .
When you select a broadcast job, the job itself is cancelled.
Memo
The job that is being transmitted is displayed at the top of
the list.
Checking Transmission and
Reception History
You can check transmission and reception history
and results.
Memo
If a fax is being transmitted, you can check the
transmission on the [Fax Job View/Cancel] screen.
1 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key on the
operator panel.
2 Check that [Fax] is selected and then
press to the fax start screen.
3 Press the to select [Fax History] and
then press .
4 Press the to select [Tx History] or
[Rx History] and then press .
5 Press the to select the history you
want to check and then press .
6 Check the history contents and then
press .
Note
The received message history displayed on the panel is
only for messages received with F code polling.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Machine Behavior in Fax Reception
-92-
Machine Behavior in Fax Reception
This section explains how your machine behaves when receiving and printing faxes.
Reception Behavior
The machine behavior differs depending on the
specified reception mode.
Your machine is set by factory default to [Fax
Ready Mode] so that it automatically receives
faxes. If you have changed the fax reception
mode, see the following descriptions for the
machine behavior.
When the machine is receiving faxes, the <DATA
IN MEMORY> indicator is lit. If <STATUS> is
pressed and is pressed twice, the information
is displayed on the display screen. Even if the
reception is finished, the indicator remains lit
while the data is stored in memory.
Memo
If the memory overflows while the machine is receiving
data, the reception is cancelled. If this happens, ask the
sender to resend the fax.
When Receiving Calls and Faxes
(Tel/Fax Ready Mode)
When the machine is set to [Tel/Fax Ready
Mode], you can receive calls and faxes. You
must connect an external telephone in advance
to receive calls.
Reference
For details on how to connect an external telephone, refer
to "Connecting a Telephone Line" P. 41.
Receiving Faxes
The machine automatically starts fax reception.
Receiving Calls
The telephone starts ringing when it receives calls.
1
Pick up the handset when the machine rings.
You can talk with someone on it.
2
If you want to receive a fax, press .
If you keep picking up the handset, you can talk to
the sender after receiving faxes.
Memo
If you often receive calls, it is recommended that you
activate [Tel Priority Mode]. For more detailed
information on [Tel Priority Mode], please refer to User's
Manual Advanced.
If connecting to a telephone unit that is far away, you can
receive faxes by dialing the remote switchover number.
Please dial the remote switchover number within three
seconds. For more details on the remote switch over
number, please refer to User's Manual Advanced.
When Connecting An Answering
Machine (Ans/Fax Ready Mode)
When the machine is set to [Ans/Fax Ready
Mode], you can use an answering machine and
receive faxes automatically. Be sure to connect
an external answering machine in advance.
Memo
Depending on the answering machine and the sender
machine, [Ans/Fax Ready Mode] may not operate
correctly.
Reference
For details on how to connect an answering machine, refer
to "Connecting a Telephone Line" P. 41.
Receiving Faxes
The answering machine rings, the reply message
starts, and the machine automatically starts fax
reception.
Receiving Calls
The answering machine rings, the reply message
starts, and then it starts recording a message.
When Often Using Telephone (Tel
Ready Mode)
[
Tel Ready Mode
] is recommended if you often use
the external telephone connected to the machine.
Receiving Calls
The telephone starts ringing when it receives
calls.
Receiving Faxes
The telephone starts ringing when it receives a
signal.
1
Pick up the handset when the machine rings.
2 Press .
To restart a conversation after receiving a fax, just
pick up the receiver. After the fax has been
received, you can talk on the phone.
MONO
MONO
Machine Behavior in Fax Reception
-93-
Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
3
When using two numbers with distinct rings(DRD)
This mode is programmed for the fax to answer only on a distinctive ring. You can have a signal phone line to have
two numbers with distinct rings, one for regular phone calls and one for fax. If the phone line is in use, and there is
an incoming fax, the sender will receive a busy signal.
There are several type of DRD ring pattern. The length of ring ON time and ring OFF time is different.
It depends on the Country Code.
Please set the Country Code and DRD Type for your suitable DRD ring pattern.
Country Code : except New Zealand, Australia and Hong Kong (This pattern is to apply to USA's DRD.)
Country Code : New Zealand (This pattern is to apply to New Zealand's DRD.)
Country Code : Australia (This pattern is to apply to Australia's DRD.)
Country Code : Hong Kong (This pattern is to apply to Hong Kong's DRD.)
Setting method to change the DRD
pattern
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
The default password is "aaaaaa".
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [User Install] and
then press .
6 Press the to select [DRD Type] and
then press .
7 Press the to select DRD Type and then
press .
8 Press the until the top screen appears.
DRD Type The length of ring ON time and ring OFF time
Type1 2 sec ON - 4 sec OFF repeat
Type2 0.8 sec ON - 0.4 sec OFF - 0.8 sec ON - 4 sec OFF repeat
Type3 0.4 sec ON - 0.2 sec OFF - 0.4 sec ON - 0.2 sec OFF - 0.8 sec ON - 4 sec OFF repeat
Type4 0.3 sec ON - 0.2 sec OFF - 1 sec ON - 0.2 sec OFF - 0.3 sec ON - 4 sec OFF repeat
DRD Type The length of ring ON time and ring OFF time
Type1 0.4 sec ON - 0.2 sec OFF - 0.4 sec ON - 2 sec OFF repeat
Type2 0.4 sec ON - 2.6 sec OFF repeat
Type3 0.4 sec ON - 0.2 sec OFF - 0.4 sec ON - 0.2 sec OFF - 0.4 sec ON - 1.4 sec OFF repeat
Type4 0.4 sec ON - 0.8 sec OFF - 0.4 sec ON - 1.4 sec OFF repeat
DRD Type The length of ring ON time and ring OFF time
Type1 0.4 sec ON - 0.2 sec OFF - 0.4 sec ON - 2 sec OFF repeat
Type2 0.2 sec ON - 0.4 sec OFF - 0.2 sec ON - 0.4 sec OFF - 0.2 sec ON - 1.6 sec OFF repeat
DRD Type The length of ring ON time and ring OFF time
Type1 1.2 sec ON - 3 sec OFF repeat
Type2 0.4 sec ON - 0.2 sec OFF - 0.4 sec ON - 0.2 sec OFF - 0.8 sec ON - 0.4 sec OFF repeat
Type3 0.5 sec ON - 0.5 sec OFF - 1 sec ON - 0.5 sec OFF - 0.5 sec ON - 3 sec OFF repeat
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Machine Behavior in Fax Reception
-94-
Printing Received Faxes
The machine automatically prints out the received
fax. You can specify the paper tray to use.
Do not pull out the paper trays when the machine is
printing.
Memo
Use only standard or recycled paper.
Available paper sizes are A4, letter, or legal.
Reference
Images larger than the specified paper are reduced,
discarded, or printed onto multiple sheets of paper
depending on the reception print settings. For details, refer
to the User's Manual Advanced.
Selecting the Tray to Use
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Paper Setup] and
then press .
3 Press the to select [Select Tray] and
then press .
4 Check that [Fax] is selected and then
press .
5 Press the to select a paper tray and
then press .
6 Press the to select a value and then
press .
- When you select [ON (Prior)] for a paper tray,
the tray is used in priority to other trays
containing the same size paper.
- The MP tray is set to [OFF] by factory default.
7 Press the until the top screen is
displayed.
When Unable to Print Received
Faxes
When the machine cannot print received faxes
due to a lack of paper or paper jams, it stores
the received fax data temporarily in memory.
When the problem is resolved, it starts printing
automatically.
Reference
For details on how to load paper, refer to "Loading Paper"
P. 3 2 .
For details on how to clear paper jams, refer to "Paper
Jams" P. 135.
To check the reception history, refer to "Checking
Transmission and Reception History" P. 91.
Settable Values:
ON* OFF ON (Prior)
*indicates the factory default.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Phone Book
-95-
Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
3
Phone Book
This section explains how to register fax numbers in the phone book, and how to edit or delete
registered numbers. In the phone book, you can set frequently used numbers to speed dial and also
create groups of numbers to which you can broadcast faxes.
Speed Dial
You can register up to 100 favorite destinations
to speed dial.
Registering and Editing
Reference
For details on how to enter text, refer to "Entering Text
Using the Operator Panel" P. 27.
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Phone Book] and
then press .
3 Check that [Speed Dial] is selected and
then press .
4 Press the to select a speed dial
number and then press .
You cannot select a speed dial which is specified as
a reserved fax job or for the auto delivery function.
5 Check that [Register] is selected and
then press .
When editing a registered speed dial number,
select [Edit].
6 If necessary, specify an entry name.
a) Check that [Name] is selected and then
press the .
b) Enter a name.
Enter a name up to 24 characters.
c) Select [Enter] and then press .
7 Press the to select [Fax Number] and
then press .
8 Enter a phone number.
Enter a phone number up to 40 digits.
9 Select [Enter] and then press .
10 If necessary, specify a group number.
a) Press the to select [Group No] and
then press the .
b) Press the to select a group number
(1 to 20).
The check box is selected. You can select
multiple entries.
c) When you have selected all the groups,
press the .
d) Check that [
Group Selection Completed]
is selected and then press .
11 Press .
Memo
Numbers registered to groups from the [Speed Dial]
function are synchronized with the numbers that are
registered to groups using the [Group No] function.
Registering From History
You can register phone numbers as speed dial
numbers from fax transmission and reception
histories.
1 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key on the
operator panel.
2 Check that [Fax] is selected and then
press to open the fax start screen.
3 Press the to select [Fax History] and
then press .
4 Press the to select [Tx History] or
[Rx History] and then press .
5 Press the to select an entry and then
press .
6 Check the entry contents and then press
the .
7 Check that [Register To Speed Dial] is
selected and then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Phone Book
-96-
8 Repeat steps 4 to 11 in "Registering and
Editing" P. 95.
The fax number is automatically entered. You do
not have to enter it manually.
Deleting
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Phone Book] and
then press .
3 Check that [Speed Dial] is selected and
then press .
4 Press the to select an entry number
and then press .
5 Press the to select [Delete] and then
press .
6 Press the or to select [Yes] and
then press .
You cannot delete an entry which is specified as a reserved
fax job or for the auto delivery function.
Group Dial (Group Number)
You can create up to 20 groups and register the
entire group as a speed dial number.
Registering and Editing
Reference
For details on how to enter text, refer to "Entering Text
Using the Operator Panel" P. 27.
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Phone Book] and
then press .
3 Press the to select [Group No] and
then press .
4 Press the to select a group number
and then press .
5 Check that [Register] is selected and
then press .
When editing registered group numbers, select
[Edit].
6 Check that [Name] is selected and then
press .
7 Enter a name.
Enter a name up to 16 characters.
8 Select [Enter] and then press .
9 Press the to select [Speed Dial] and
then press the .
10 Press the to select a speed dial
number (1 to 100) and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
entries.
11 When you have selected all the numbers,
press the .
12 Check that [Complete] is selected and
then press .
13 Press .
Memo
Numbers registered to groups from the [Speed Dial]
function are synchronized with the numbers that are
registered to groups using the [Group No.] function.
Deleting
1
Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Phone Book] and
then press .
3 Press the to select [Group No] and
then press .
4 Press the to select a group number
and then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Phone Book
-97-
Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
3
5 Press the to select [Delete] and then
press .
6 Press the or to select [Yes] and
then press .
Memo
You cannot delete an entry which is specified as a reserved
fax job or for the auto delivery function.
One-Touch Key Pad
The speed dials no.1 to 16 are automatically
registered to the one-touch key pad.
Register all telephone numbers
All contents of Phone Book can be registered by
using Configuration Tool. For setting up of
Configuration Tool, see User's Manual (Advanced),
"7. Useful Software".
Registering the Machine
When using the Configuration Tool or introducing
a new machine, register the machine in the
Configuration Tool.
1 Select [Start], [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[Configuration Tool]>
[Configuration Tool].
2 Select [Register Device] from the
[Tools] menu. Search results are
displayed.
3 Select the machine and click on
[Register].
4 On the confirmation screen, click on
[Yes].
Importing Addresses from a File.
1 Select from which device to import, from
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [Speed Dial Manager].
4 Enter the administrator password and
click [OK].
5 Click .
6 Select [Open] from [Select CSV File].
7 Select the file you want to import and
click on [Open].
8 Click on [Next].
9 Select the settings to import and click
[Import].
10 Click .
Memo
CSV files exported by Outlook Express (Windows email and
Windows Live email) can also be restored.
OK
OK
Basic Procedure for Scan To Fax Server
-98-
Basic Procedure for Scan To Fax Server
This section explains basic operations for data transmission to the fax server.
The FaxServer function allows you to transmit fax data as a file attached to an e-mail. A document is
scanned and converted to a TIFF file. The data is transmitted immediately after scanning without being
saved in memory. You can specify only e-mail addresses for the destination.
The Scan To Fax Server function must be enabled by Admin Setup (see the Advanced manual). Once the
Scan To Fax Server function is enabled, the analog fax is disabled to send and receive messages.
Memo
You can load only A4, letter or legal size documents in the ADF, and only A4, letter or legal (MB491+LP/MPS4700mb only) size
documents on the document glass. You cannot load mixed size documents for fax transmission.
Depending on the recipient's machine, the document data sent by the FaxServer function may not be printed correctly.
The detailed settings on the FaxServer function are the same as in the scan to e-mail function. For details, refer to the "User's
Manual Advanced".
Reference
Before using the FaxServer function, you must set up the server. For the server setup, refer to "Setting Up Scan To E-mail and
Internet Fax" P. 66.
Transmitting Data to Fax Server
1 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key on the
operator panel.
2 The original can be set by an automatic
document feeder or the document glass.
3 Select [FAX], and then press .
4 Set the scan options as required.
Reference
"User's Manual Advanced".
5 Check that [Add Destination] is
selected, and then press .
6 Specify the destination fax number.
You can specify the destination using either the
Speed Dial List, Group List, Direct Input, or Tx
History.
7 Press the Start button to start fax
transmission.
When you scan multiple documents on the
document glass, enable the Continuous Scan
mode.
Reference
"Enabling Continuous Scan Mode (Continuous Scan)"
P. 8 2 .
Specifying the destination
You can specify fax destination in any of the following
four ways:
• Using the Speed Dial List
• Using the Group List
• Using the Direct Input
• Using the Tx History
Use any of the following operations in the procedure of
"Transmitting Data to Fax Server" P. 98.
Using the Speed Dial List or Group List
You can quickly select fax destinations from the
Speed Dial List or Group List. You need to
register recipients on the Speed Dial List or
Group List in advance.
Reference
For fax number entry on the Speed Dial List or Group List,
refer to the
"Phone Book" P. 95
.
1 Press the to select [Speed Dial List]
or [Group List], and then press .
2 Press the to select the destination or
group, and then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
Basic Procedure for Scan To Fax Server
-99-
Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
3
The box is checked. You can select multiple entries.
3 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
4 Check that [Complete] is selected, and
then press .
Direct Input
This is the same as the fax function.
Using the Tx History
You can select a destination from the recently
called 50 recipients listed on the transmission
history.
1 Press the to select [Transmission
History], and then press .
2 Press the to select an entry, and then
press .
The box is checked. You can select multiple
entries.
3 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
4 Check that [Complete] is selected, and
then press .
Using the one-touch keys
This is the same as the fax function. Enter the
text in the similar way.
Deleting the specified destination
This is the same as the fax function. Enter the
text in the similar way.
Stopping the fax transmission
This is the same as the Internet fax function.
Enter the text in the similar way.
OK
OK
OK
OK
Basic Procedure for Internet Faxing
-100-
Basic Procedure for Internet Faxing
This section explains basic operations for transmitting Internet faxes.
The Internet fax function allows you to transmit fax data as a file attached to an e-mail. A document is
scanned and converted to a TIFF file. The data is transmitted immediately after scanning without being
saved in memory. You can specify only e-mail addresses for the destination.
Memo
You can load only A4, letter or legal size documents in the ADF, and only A4, letter or legal (MB491+LP/MPS4700mb only) size
documents on the document glass. You cannot load mixed size documents for Internet faxing.
Depending on the recipient's machine, the document data sent by the Internet fax function may not be printed correctly.
The detailed settings on the Internet fax function are the same as in the scan to e-mail function. For details, refer to the User's
Manual Advanced.
Reference
Before using the Internet fax function, you need to configure the server settings. For details, refer to "Setting Up Scan To E-mail
and Internet Fax" P. 66.
Sending an Internet Fax
1 Press the <FAX/HOOK> key on the
operator panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to select [Internet Fax]
and then press .
4 Configure the Internet fax settings if
necessary.
Reference
For details on the Internet fax settings, refer to the
User's Manual Advanced.
5 Check that [Add Destination] is
selected and then press .
Memo
Here you can add addressees by using one-touch keys. You
can add addresses with [To]. Thereafter, you can add
multiple addresses using the one-touch keys.
6 Check that [To] is selected and then
press .
Press to select [Cc] or [Bcc] if necessary.
7 Specify a destination.
- You can set the recipient by directly entering them
or by using the address book, group list, sending
history, LDAP search or one-touch key.
Reference
Refer to "Specifying a Destination" P. 101.
8 Press to start transmission.
If you want to scan multiple documents with the
document glass, enable the continuous scan
mode.
Reference
"Enabling Continuous Scan Mode (Continuous Scan)"
P. 8 2
Reference
For details on how to load your documents in the ADF or on
the document glass, refer to "Loading Documents" P. 38.
OK
OK
OK
MONO
Basic Procedure for Internet Faxing
-101-
Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
3
Specifying a Destination
You can specify a destination in the following five
ways:
Using the address book
Using a group
Using the transmission histories
Direct input
Using LDAP search
Perform one of the following procedures at step 7
of "Sending an Internet Fax" P. 100 described
above.
Using the Address Book and Group
List
You can select a destination from the address
book or groups. You need to register them in
advance.
Reference
For details on how to add e-mail addresses to the address
book and groups, refer to "Registering Address Book" P. 119.
1 Press the to select [Address Book] or
[Group list] and then press .
2 Press the to select the destination or
group you want and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
entries.
3 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
4 Check that [Complete] is selected and
then press .
5 Press the to return to the Internet fax
start screen.
Using the Transmission History
You can select a destination from transmission
histories.
Note
The sending history only shows those recipients which had
their addresses directly entered.
1 Press the to select [Tx History] and
then press .
2 Press the to select the entry you want
and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
entries.
3 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
4 Check that [Complete] is selected and
then press .
5 Press the to return to the Internet fax
start screen.
Direct Input
You can enter a destination directly.
Reference
For details on how to enter text, refer to "Entering Text
Using the Operator Panel" P. 27.
1 Press the to select [Direct Input] and
then press .
2 Enter an e-mail address.
An e-mail address up to 80 characters.
3 Select [Enter] and then press .
4 Press the to return to the Internet fax
start screen.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Basic Procedure for Internet Faxing
-102-
Using LDAP Search
You can search for a destination that is on the
LDAP server.
You can select either [Simple Search] or
[Advanced Search] for the method of
searching.
[Simple Search] only searches for a single
keyword as a username. Also, with Simple
Search you can only search for character strings
included in usernames. You cannot search for
character strings in e-mail addresses.
When you select [Advanced Search], you can
search for a user name or e-mail address. You
can also select search conditions to retrieve only
results that contain all the specified keywords.
Reference
For details on the LDAP server settings, refer to the User's
Manual Advanced.
For Simple Search
1 Press the to select [LDAP] and then
press .
2 Check that [Simple Search] is selected
and press .
3 Enter a keyword to search for a user
name in the LDAP server.
4 Select [Enter] and then press to start
searching.
5 When the search results appear, press
the to select the destination you want
and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
addresses.
6 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
7 Check that [Complete] is selected and
then press .
8 Press the to return to the Internet fax
start screen.
For Advanced Search
1 Press the to select [LDAP] and then
press .
2 Press the to select [Advanced
Search] and then press .
3 Check that [Search Method] is selected
and press .
4
Select either [
OR
] or [
AND
] and press .
5 Press , select [User name], and then
press .
6 Enter the keyword to search for.
7 Select [Enter] and then press .
8 Press , select [E-mail Address], and
then press .
9 Enter the keyword to search for.
10 Select [Enter] and then press .
11 Press to start searching.
12 When the search results appear, press
the to select the destination you want
and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
addresses.
13 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
14 Check that [Complete] is selected and
then press .
15 Press the to return to the Internet fax
start screen.
Checking, Deleting, and
Changing Destinations
Checking a Destination
1 Press the on the start screen to select
the specified destination and then
press .
2 Press the to select the destination
type you want to check and then
press .
The destination type includes To, Cc, and Bcc.
3 When you have checked the destination,
press the .
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Basic Procedure for Internet Faxing
-103-
Faxing (for MB451, MB451w, MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
3
4 Check that [Close the list] is selected
and then press .
Deleting a Destination
1 Press the on the start screen to select
the specified destination and then press
.
2 Press the to select the destination
type in which the destination you want to
delete is included and then press .
The destination type includes To, Cc, and Bcc.
3 Press the to select the destination you
want to delete and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
addresses.
4 When you have selected all the
destinations to be deleted, press the .
5 Press the select [Delete The
Address] and then press .
Changing the Destination Type
1 Press the on the start screen to select
the specified destination and then press
.
2 Press the to select the destination
type in which the destination you want to
change is included and then press .
The destination type includes To, Cc, and Bcc.
3 Press the to select the destination you
want to change and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
addresses.
4 When you have selected all the
destinations to be changed, press the .
5 Check that [Edit Destination Type] is
selected and then press .
6 Press the to select the destination
type you want from [To], [Cc], or [Bcc]
and then press .
Canceling Transmission
While the "Scanning" screen is displayed, you
can cancel the job.
1 Press the <STOP> key on the operator
panel to cancel transmission.
Receiving Internet Faxes
The machine automatically prints the Internet
faxes it receives. If the document is larger than
A4 size, the machine automatically reduces it to
the size of the paper in the specified paper tray.
Reference
If you want to forward an Internet fax, you can use the
auto delivery function (MB491, MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only). For details, refer to the
User's Manual Advanced.
The Auto Delivery function does not operate on machines
that do not have an SD card inserted.
In order to receive Internet faxes, it is necessary to
configure e-mail receiving settings beforehand. For details,
please refer to the User's Manual Advanced.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
-104-
4. Scanning
This chapter explains the basic operation and settings for your machine's scanning functions.
Installing Scanner Drivers (TWAIN/WIA/ICA Driver)
This section explains the procedure to install the scanner driver. Before using scan function, install the
scanner driver. You can install TWAIN driver and WIA (Windows only) driver at the same time. Install the
TWAIN driver and ICA driver (dedicate to the Mac OS X) separately.
If you want to use the network scan function, follow the installation procedure below and register the
information of your computer and then install the scanner driver.
Memo
When using the network scan function in Windows, please install the ActKey utility.
Reference
Before installing the scanner driver manual, do the network settings.For details on how to do network settings, refer to
"Network Connection" P. 47.
When using a scanner with a network connection in Windows, if the equipment IP address is changed, please change the
settings in Network Configuration. For Mac OS X, please change settings in network scanner setting tools. For details, refer to
User's Manual Advanced.
The Twain driver for Mac OS X supports the Mac OS X 10.4 to 10.7.
Installation Procedure
Memo
When using the network scan function in Windows, please
install the Network Configuration. For Mac OS X, the
network scanner setting tools will be installed
automatically.
For Windows
1
Ensure that your machine and the
computer are turned on and connected,
and then insert the "Software DVD-ROM"
into the computer.
2 Click [Run setup.exe] after [Auto
Play] is displayed.
If the [User Account Control] dialog box
appears, click [Yes].
3 Select the language and then click
[Next].
4 Select the device of your machine, and
then click [Next].
5 Read the license agreement and then
click [I Agree].
6 Select the proper driver under
[Software], and then click the install
icon.
If the scanner driver has been installed, the setup
maintenance program of the scanner driver is
displayed. Check the checkbox of [Add] and then
click [Next] to proceed to step 8.
7 Click [Next].
Installing Scanner Drivers (TWAIN/WIA/ICA Driver)
-105-
Scanning
4
8 Check the checkbox of [Network
scanner] and click [Next].
9 Select [IP Address] or [Search MFP]
check box to enter the address of the
machine and then click [Next].
If you want to set the [IP Address], follow
procedure 10.
10 If [Search MFP] is selected, select the
machine and click [Next].
11 Set the scanner driver name and click
[Next].
12 Enter the host name, IP address and port
number and then click [Configure].
13 Click [Next].
14 Click [Next].
15 Click [Finish].
For Mac OS X
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to
the PC and the power switch of the machine
is turned ON. Then, load the "Software
DVD-ROM" on the drive of the PC.
2
Double-click the [
OKI
] icon on the desktop.
3 Double-click [Drivers] > [Scanner] >
[Installer for OS X 10.8] (For Mac OS
X 10.8) or [Installer for OS X 10.4-
10.7] (For Mac OS X 10.4 to 10.7).
Installing Scanner Drivers (TWAIN/WIA/ICA Driver)
-106-
4 Click [Continue].
5 Click [Continue].
6 Check the display and click [Continue] if
OK.
7 Read the license agreement and click
[Continue].
8 Click [Agree] if you agree.
9 Click [Install].
To change the installation location of the
driver, click [Change Install Location].
10 Enter the administrator name and
password, and click [OK].
11 Click [Continue Installation].
12 Click [Restart].
Installing Scanner Drivers (TWAIN/WIA/ICA Driver)
-107-
Scanning
4
Using ActKey Software
Using the ActKey, you can start a scan job in
specified settings with a click a button.
Memo
ActKey does not support Mac OS X.
Using WSD Scanning, Actkey does not work.
When ActKey is installed, Network Configuration is also
installed simultaneously.
Reference
For details on how to start a scan job, refer to the User's
Manual Advanced.
Installing the Software
1 Insert the "Software DVD-ROM" into your
computer.
A window opens.
2 Select [ActKey] from [Software].
3 Install the software as instructed.
4 Click [Finish].
Starting the Software
1 Click [Start] to select [All Programs] >
[Okidata] > [ActKey] > [ActKey].
Setup to use the WSD Scan
-108-
Setup to use the WSD Scan
The following explains how to set up the PC to use the WSD Scan function. In order to use the WSD
Scan function, install this device on the PC.
WSD Scan can be used from Scan To Local PC and Scan To Remote PC via Network.
To use WSD Scan, the machine has to be connected with the computer which Windows Vista/
Windows7/ Windows8/ Windows Server 2008/ Windows Server 2008R2/ Windows Server 2012 was
installed via Network.
Reference
Before starting the following procedure, be sure to check the network connection. For details, see "Network
Connection" P. 47.
If a scanner is used via WSD Scan connection and if the device IP address is changed, select [Uninstall] in step 2 of
Installation procedure and uninstall the scanner, and then execute the install procedure again.
Installation procedure
Memo
When you follow the procedure below, the WIA is installed
automatically as the scanner driver.
Before starting the installation, select [Network and
Sharing Center] from the Control Panel and make sure
that Network Search is enabled.
1 From the [Start] menu, select
[Network]. The devices connected to
the network are displayed.
2 Right-click the MB491 icon under
[Multifunction Devices] and select
[Install].
If the [User Account Control] dialog box is
displayed, click [Yes].
3 When the balloon message saying that
the installation is complete is displayed
on the task bar, click the balloon to check
the details, and click [Close].
Check the device installation on the machine as
follows.
4 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
5 Press the to select [Local PC] and
then press .
6 Check that [Select A Connecting PC] is
selected, and press .
7 Press the to select [From WSD
Scan], and press .
8 Make sure that the device installation PC
is displayed as the destination PC.
Memo
A maximum of 50 PCs can be registered.
OK
OK
OK
Scanning Methods
-109-
Scanning
4
Scanning Methods
This section explains the basic operation of the scan function. In scan mode, you can use five scan
functions, scan to e-mail, scan to USB memory, scan to network computer, scan to local computer and
PC scan. You can select these functions after pressing <SCAN> key.
Reference
The scan function supports the Continuous Scan mode. For details on the [Continuous Scan] functions, refer to
"Enabling Continuous Scan Mode (Continuous Scan)" P. 82.
Scan to E-mail
You can scan a document and attach it to an
e-mail.
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Make sure [E-mail] is selected and then
press .
Memo
Here you can add addressees by using one-touch keys.
You can add addresses with [To]. Thereafter, you can add
multiple addresses using the one-touch keys.
4 Make sure [Add Destination] is
selected and then press .
5 Make sure [To] is selected and then
press .
Press
the to select [Cc] or [Bcc] and
then press
.
6 Specify a destination.
You can specify a destination by direct input or
from the address book, groups, e-mail histories,
LDAP or one-touch key.
7 Press or .
Specifying a Destination
You can specify a destination in the following six
ways:
Using the address book
Using a group list
Using the e-mail history
Direct input
Using LDAP search
Using the one-touch key pad
Perform any of the following operations at step 6
of "Scan to E-mail" stated above.
Using the Address Book or Group
List
You can select a destination from the address
book or group list. Be sure to register them in
advance.
Reference
For how to register destinations in the address book or
group list, refer to "Registering Address Book" P. 119.
1 Press the to select [Address book]
or [Group list] and then press .
2 Press the to select the destination or
group you want and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
entries.
3 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
4 Check that [Complete] is selected and
then press .
5 Press the to return to start screen.
Using E-mail History
You can select a destination from transmission
histories.
1 Press the to select [Tx History] and
then press .
2 Press the to select a destination and
then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
entries.
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
COLO
R
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Scanning Methods
-110-
3 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
4
Check that [
Complete
] is selected and
then press
.
5 Press the to return to start screen.
Direct Input
You can enter a destination directly using the
onscreen keyboard.
1 Press the to select [Direct Input] and
then press .
2 Enter a destination e-mail address up to
80 characters.
Reference
For how to enter texts, refer to "Entering Text Using the
Operator Panel" P. 27.
3 Select [Enter] and then press .
4 Press the to return to start screen.
Using LDAP Search
You can search for a destination from the list on
the LDAP server.
You can select either [
Simple Search
] or
[
Advanced Search
] for the method of searching.
[Simple Search] only searches for a single
keyword as a username. Also, with Simple
Search you can only search for character strings
included in usernames. You cannot search for
character strings in e-mail addresses.
When you select [Advanced Search], you can
search for a user name or e-mail address. You
can also select search conditions to retrieve only
results that contain all the specified keywords.
Reference
For the LDAP server setting, refer to User's Manual
Advanced.
For Simple Search
1 Press the to select [LDAP] and then
press .
2 Check that [Simple Search] is selected
and press .
3 Enter a keyword to search for a user
name on the LDAP server.
4 Select [Enter] and then press to start
searching.
5 When the search results appear, press
the to select the destination you want
and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
entries.
6 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
7 Check that [Complete] is selected and
then press .
8 Press the to return to start screen.
For Advanced Search
1 Press the to select [LDAP] and then
press .
2 Press to select [Advanced Search]
and then press .
3 Check that [Simple Search] is selected
and press .
4 Select either [OR] or [AND] and
press .
5 Press , select [User Name], and then
press .
6 Enter the keyword to search for.
7 Select [Enter] and then press .
8 Press , select [E-mail Address], and
then press .
9 Enter the keyword to search for.
10 Select [Enter] and then press .
11 Press to start searching.
12 When the search results appear, press
the to select the destination you want
and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple
addresses.
13 When you have selected all the
destinations, press the .
14 Check that [Complete] is selected and
then press .
15 Press the to return to start screen.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Scanning Methods
-111-
Scanning
4
Scan to Network PC
You can send a scanned document to a server on
the network.
The document is scanned and converted to a
PDF, JPEG, TIFF, or XPS file. The factory default
setting is PDF.
Check that the machine is connected to the network.
It is necessary to set up Scan To Network PC in advance.
Reference
For the Scan To Network PC setup, please refer to "Setting
Up Scan To Network PC" P. 68.
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to select [Network PC] and
then press .
4 Check that [Select Profile] is selected
and then press .
5 Press the to select a profile and then
press .
6 Press or .
Scan to USB Memory
You can save the scanned document in a USB
memory.
Reference
For the specifications of USB memory that you can use, please
refer to "Print From USB Memory Specifications" P. 188.
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Insert the USB memory into the USB
memory interface of the machine.
Note
Insert the USB memory into the USB port straight. If it
is not inserted with the correct angle, the USB port
may be damaged.
4 Press the to select [USB Memory]
and then press .
5 Press the to scanning settings if
necessary.
6 Press or .
7 Remove the USB memory from the port
after the message is displayed indicating
that it is OK to remove the USB memory.
OK
OK
OK
MONO
COLO
R
OK
MONO
COLOR
Scanning Methods
-112-
Scan to Local PC
You can save the scanned data into your local computer.
When you press the or , the scan
job starts and the ActKey utility and the TWAIN
driver start automatically. You can send the
scanned document to a specified application,
save it in a specified folder, or send it by fax.
In the WSD Scan connection, you can set an
application to start and a location where you
send or store documents for each recipient.
The machine can be connected to USB interface
or network, but only a computer can be
connected at the same time.
If the Mac OS X is running, the image capture
and the ICA driver start up automatically.
You can select a folder and save the scanned
documents in it.
Connect the machine to a computer via USB or a network.
Install ActKey and scanner driver before scanning to a
local computer.
If you connect the machine to network, follow these
instructions.
-Set [TCP/IP] setting to [Enable].
- Conform the IP version of the machine to that of your
computer.
- Set up the DNS server.
- Enable the network TWAIN setting.
If the Mac OS X is running, you can scan a document in
the fixed A4 size only on the document glass.
If the Mac OS X 10.7 to 10.8 is running and if you scan
documents through network connection, you need to start the
image capture first. Then, you need to select the machine
from the list displayed at the left of image capture screen.
To use the MFP in WSD Scan connection, set the followings.
-Set the [TCP/IP] setting of the MFP to [Enable].
- Match the IP version between the MFP and the PC.
- Enable the WSD Scan.
- Install the MFP on the PC.
Reference
For details on how to enable the network TWAIN setting,
refer to the User's Manual Advanced.
For details on how to install the ActKey utility, refer to the
User's Manual Advanced.
For the procedure to enable WSD Scan, see the "User's
Manual, Applications."
For the procedure to install the MFP on the PC, see "Setup
to use the WSD Scan" P. 108.
Connecting via USB
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator panel.
2
Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
3 Press the to select [Local PC] and
then press .
If the Network TWAIN setting is set to [Disable],
proceed to step 6.
4 Check that [Select A Connecting PC] is
selected and then press .
5 Press the to select [From USB
Interface] and then press .
6 Press the to select [Select An
Application] and then press .
7 Press the to select where to send the
scanned document and then press .
Note
If the Mac OS X is running, you can select Folder only.
8 Press or .
Memo
If you select [Application], the specified application starts
and the scanned image is displayed on the application.
If you select [Folder], the scanned image is saved in the
specified folder.
If you select [PC-FAX], the application for fax
transmission starts. After sending the scanned image,
send a fax with the fax transmission software on your
computer.
Connecting via Network
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator panel.
2
Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
3 Press the to select [Local PC] and
then press .
4 Check that select [Select A Connecting
PC] is selected and then press .
5 Check that [From Network] is selected
and then press .
6 Press the to select the computer you
want and then press .
MONO
COLOR
Selectable location Values to send:
Application Folder PC-FAX
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
COLOR
OK
OK
OK
OK
Scanning Methods
-113-
Scanning
4
7 Press the to select [Select An
Application] and then press .
8 Press the to select where to send the
scanned document and then press .
9 Press or .
Memo
If you select [Application], the specified application starts
and the scanned image is displayed on the application.
If you select [Folder], the scanned image is saved in the
specified folder.
If you select [
PC-FAX
], the application for fax transmission
starts. After sending the scanned image, send your fax with
the fax transmission software on your computer.
WSD Scan connection
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the Operation
Panel.
2 Place the original on the automatic
document feeder or on the scanner glass.
3 Press the to select [Local PC] and
then press .
4 Check that the [Select A Connecting
PC] is selected, and press .
5 Press the to select [From WSD Scan]
and then press .
6 Press the to select the destination PC
and then press .
7 Press the to select [Duplex Scan]
and then press .
8 Press the or to select [ON] or
[OFF] and then press .
9 Press or .
Memo
To start the dual-sided scan, turn its setting On and place
the original on the automatic document feeder. If you turn
the dual-sided scan On but place the document on the
scanner glass, you cannot scan the dual sides of document.
When using the scanner application on PC, it will be
scanned by the scanner type of scan profile setup on PC,
regardless of where the document is set or the setting of
[
Duplex Scan
].
Scan to Remote PC
This will launch the Scanner driver from a utility
installed on the PC (ActKey, PaperPort, Image,
Adobe Photoshop CS3, etc.) and will begin scanning.
Connect the machine to a computer via USB or a
network.
TWAIN (USB connection and Network
connection) and WSD Scan are supported.
There are 3 Modes of Operation:
Simple Scan Mode, Manual Scan Mode, and
Secure Scan Mode.
In Simple Scan Mode, the scanning can be
started from all computers via USB, Network and
WSD Scan connection, without special operation
on the operator panel.
In Manual Scan Mode, the scanning can be
started from all computers via USB, Network and
WSD Scan connection.
In Secure Scan Mode, scanning can only be
performed by a machine among the already
registered computers in the network via USB,
Network and WSD Scan connection.
Only one computer can be connected at the
same time.
Memo
For the following procedure, ActKey will be used as an
example for Windows, and Adobe Photoshop CS3 for Mac
OS X. The items in this manual may differ depending on
the application you are using.
Note
Connect the machine to a computer via USB or a network.
Install an application (ActKey, PaperPort, etc.) and a
scanner driver before starting a scan job. This installation
is NOT required for WSD Scan connection.
If you connect the machine to network, follow these
instructions.
-Set [TCP/IP] setting to [Enable].
- Conform the IP version of the machine to that of your
computer.
- Set up the DNS server.
- Enable the network TWAIN setting.
When in Secure Scan Mode, the administrator needs to
register the computer information for carrying out security
scans from the control panel or the web site beforehand.
For Mac OS X, when carrying out a network scan for the
first time, you need to set the connection target when
using a driver. When you use the driver for the first time,
the connection target selection tool will launch.
You do not need to set the connection target after the first
time.
To operate the MFP in the WSD Scan connection, set the
followings.
-Set the [TCP/IP] setting of the MFP to [Enable].
- Match the IP version between the MFP and the PC.
- Enable the WSD Scan.
- Install the MFP on the PC.
Reference
For details on how to install a scanner driver, refer to
"Installing Scanner Drivers (TWAIN/WIA/ICA Driver)" P. 104.
OK
OK
MONO
COLO
R
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
COLO
R
Scanning Methods
-114-
Simple Scan Mode
For Windows
1 Start ActKey on your computer.
2 Click the scan button you want.
The scan job starts.
Memo
If you select [Application1] or [Application2], the
specified application starts and the scanned document is
displayed on the application.
If you select [Folder], the scanned document is saved in
the specified folder.
If you select [PC-FAX], the application for fax
transmission starts and the scanned document is sent to
the application. Send your fax with the fax transmission
software on your computer.
For Mac OS X (MB441, MB451,
MB451w, MB461, MB471, MB471w,
MB491, MB491+, ES4161 MFP,
ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb)
1 Start Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
2 Select [Import] from [File] to select
[OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x USB]
or [OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x
Network].
- If you select [OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x
USB], proceed to step 10.
- If you select [OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x
Network] and the network scan is the second or
more scanning, proceed to step 10.
3 For the first network scan, the dialog box
indicating that the tool of connection
destination selection is started is
displayed, and then click [OK].
4 Select a connection destination in the
[Scan Settings] dialog box, and register
the host information if necessary. Then,
click [OK].
5 Select [Import] from [File] of Adobe
Photoshop CS3 to select [OKI
MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x Network].
The window appears.
6 Click a scan button.
Scanning starts.
7 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
For Mac OS X (MB461+LP,
MB491+LP, MPS4700mb)
1 Start Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
2 Select [Import] from [File] to select
[OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x USB] or
[OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x Network].
- If you select [OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x USB],
proceed to step 10.
- If you select [OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x
Network] and the network scan is the second or
more scanning, proceed to step 10.
3 For the first network scan, the dialog box
indicating that the tool of connection
destination selection is started is
displayed, and then click [OK].
4 Select a connection destination in the
[Scan Settings] dialog box, and register
the host information if necessary. Then,
click [OK].
5 Select [Import] from [File] of Adobe
Photoshop CS3 to select [OKI
MB4x1+LP_MPS47x Network].
The window appears.
6 Click a scan button.
Scanning starts.
7 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
For WSD Scan
1 Start any scan program on the PC.
2 Click a scan button. The document scan
starts.
Note
If the machine failed to scan, please check to see if the
panel is in operation.
Scan Button Name:
Application1, Application2, Folder, PC-
Fax
Scanning Methods
-115-
Scanning
4
Manual Scan Mode
For Windows
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Check that the [TWAIN] is selected, and
press .
5 Start ActKey on your computer.
6 Click the scan button you want.
The scan job starts.
Memo
If you select [Application1] or [Application2], the
specified application starts and the scanned document is
displayed on the application.
If you select [Folder], the scanned document is saved in
the specified folder.
If you select [PC-FAX], the application for fax
transmission starts and the scanned document is sent to
the application. Send your fax with the fax transmission
software on your computer.
For Mac OS X (MB441, MB451,
MB451w, MB461, MB471, MB471w,
MB491, MB491+, ES4161 MFP,
ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb)
1
Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Check that the [TWAIN] is selected, and
press .
5 Start Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
6 Select [Import] from [File] to select
[OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x USB]
or [OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x
Network].
- If you select [OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x
USB], proceed to step 10.
- If you select [OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x
Network] and the network scan is the second or
more scanning, proceed to step 10.
7 For the first network scan, the dialog box
indicating that the tool of connection
destination selection is started is
displayed, and then click [OK].
8 Select a connection destination in the
[Scan Settings] dialog box, and register
the host information if necessary. Then,
click [OK].
9 Select [Import] from [File] of Adobe
Photoshop CS3 to select [OKI
MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x Network].
The window appears.
10 Click a scan button.
Scanning starts.
11 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
For Mac OS X (MB461+LP,
MB491+LP, MPS4700mb)
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Check that the [TWAIN] is selected, and
press .
5 Start Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
6 Select [Import] from [File] to select
[OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x USB] or
[OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x Network].
- If you select [OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x USB],
proceed to step 10.
- If you select [OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x
Network] and the network scan is the second or
more scanning, proceed to step 10.
7 For the first network scan, the dialog box
indicating that the tool of connection
destination selection is started is
displayed, and then click [OK].
Scan Button Name:
Application1, Application2, Folder, PC-
Fax
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Scanning Methods
-116-
8 Select a connection destination in the
[Scan Settings] dialog box, and register
the host information if necessary. Then,
click [OK].
9 Select [Import] from [File] of Adobe
Photoshop CS3 to select [OKI
MB4x1+LP_MPS47x Network].
The window appears.
10 Click a scan button.
Scanning starts.
11 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
For WSD Scan
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the Operation
Panel.
2 Place the original on the automatic
document feeder or on the scanner glass.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Press the to select [WSD Scan] and
then press .
5 Start any scan program on the PC.
6 Click a scan button. The document scan
starts.
Secure Scan Mode (For Network
Connection)
For Windows
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
the press .
4
Check that the [
TWAIN
] is selected, and
press .
5
Check that [
Select a connecting PC
] is
selected and then press
.
6 Check that [From Network] is selected
and then press .
7 Press the to select the destination you
want and then press .
8 Press or .
9 Start the ActKey on your computer.
10 Click a scan button.
For Mac OS X (MB441, MB451,
MB451w, MB461, MB471, MB471w,
MB491, MB491+, ES4161 MFP,
ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb)
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
the press .
4 Check that the [TWAIN] is selected, and
press .
5
Check that [
Select a Connecting
PC
] is
selected and then press
.
6 Check that [From Network] is selected
and then press .
7 Press the to select the destination you
want and then press .
8 Press or .
9 Start the Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
10 Select [Import] from [File] to select
[OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x
Network].
If you select [OKI MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x
Network] and the network scan is the second or
more scanning, proceed to step 13.
11 For the first network scan, the dialog box
indicating that the tool of connection
destination selection is started is
displayed, and then click [OK].
12 Select a connection destination in the
[Scan Settings] dialog box, and register
the host information if necessary. Then,
click [OK].
13 Select [Import] from [File] of Adobe
Photoshop CS3 to select [OKI
MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x Network].
The window appears.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
COLOR
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
COLOR
Scanning Methods
-117-
Scanning
4
14 Click a scan button.
Scanning starts.
15 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
For Mac OS X (MB461+LP,
MB491+LP, MPS4700mb)
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
the press .
4 Check that the [TWAIN] is selected, and
press .
5
Check that [
Select a Connecting
PC
] is
selected and then press
.
6 Check that [From Network] is selected
and then press .
7 Press the to select the destination you
want and then press .
8 Press or .
9 Start the Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
10 Select [Import] from [File] to select
[OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x Network].
If you select [OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x
Network] and the network scan is the second or
more scanning, proceed to step 13.
11 For the first network scan, the dialog box
indicating that the tool of connection
destination selection is started is
displayed, and then click [OK].
12 Select a connection destination in the
[Scan Settings] dialog box, and register
the host information if necessary. Then,
click [OK].
13 Select [Import] from [File] of Adobe
Photoshop CS3 to select [OKI
MB4x1+LP_MPS47x Network].
The window appears.
14 Click a scan button.
Scanning starts.
15 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
For WSD Scan
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the Operation
Panel.
2 Place the original on the automatic
document feeder or on the scanner glass.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
then press .
4 Press the to select [WSD Scan] and
then press .
5 Start any scan program on the PC.
6 Click a scan button. The document scan
starts.
Secure Scan Mode (For USB
Connection)
For Windows
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in
the ADF or face down on the document
glass.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
the press .
4 Check that the [TWAIN] is selected, and
press .
5 Check that [Select a connecting PC] is
selected and then press .
6 Press the to select [From USB
interface] and then press .
7 Press or .
8 ActKey start on the computer.
9 Click the Scan button.
For Mac OS X (MB441, MB451,
MB451w, MB461, MB471, MB471w,
MB491, MB491+, ES4161 MFP,
ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb)
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
COLOR
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
COLOR
Scanning Methods
-118-
2 Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
the press .
4 Check that the [TWAIN] is selected, and
press .
5 Check that [Select a connecting PC] is
selected and then press .
6 Press the to select [From USB
Interface] and then press .
7 Press or .
8 Start Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
9 Select [Import] from [File] to select
[MB4x1_ES41x1_MPS42x USB].
10 Click a scan button.
Scanning starts.
11 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
For Mac OS X (MB461+LP,
MB491+LP, MPS4700mb)
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2 Place your document with text face up in the
ADF or face down on the document glass.
3 Press the to select [Remote PC] and
the press .
4 Check that the [TWAIN] is selected, and
press .
5 Check that [Select a connecting PC] is
selected and then press .
6 Press the to select [From USB
Interface] and then press .
7 Press or .
8 Start Adobe Photoshop CS3 on your
computer.
9 Select [Import] from [File] to select
[OKI MB4x1+LP_MPS47x USB].
10 Click a scan button.
Scanning starts.
11 Select [Quit Photoshop] from
[Photoshop].
Canceling the Current Scan Job
Scanning will stop while the message saying that
the document is being read is displayed.
1 Press the <STOP> key on the operator panel.
Note
You cannot cancel with Scan to Local PC and Scan to
Remote PC.
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
COLOR
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
COLO
R
Registering Address Book
-119-
Scanning
4
Registering Address Book
This section explains how to register and delete the address book and group list.
You can register e-mails to the address book and create groups for broadcasting messages. The Address
Book and the Group List can be used to specify the destination in Scan to e-mail and Internet fax
functions.
Address Book
You can register up to 100 e-mail addresses to
the address book.
Registering and Editing
Reference
For details on how to enter text, refer to "Entering Text
Using the Operator Panel" P. 27.
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Address Book]
and then press .
3 Check that [E-mail Address] is selected
and then press .
4 Press the to select a number and then
press .
You cannot select a number which is specified in
Auto Delivery function.
5 Check that [Register] is selected and
then press .
If editing registered addresses, select [Edit].
6 If necessary, specify a name.
a) Check that [Name] is selected and then
press the .
b) Enter a name up to 16 characters.
c)
Select [Enter] and then press .
7 Press the to select [E-mail Address]
and then press .
8 Enter an e-mail address up to 80
characters and then press .
9 Press .
Registering From Transmission
History
You can add e-mail addresses to the address
book from e-mail transmission histories.
Note
The sending history only displays recipient addresses to
which an e-mail was sent by directly entering the
recipient's address.
1 Press the <SCAN> key on the operator
panel.
2 Check that [E-mail] is selected and then
press .
3 Press the to select [E-mail Tx
History] and then press .
4 Press the to select the entry you want
and then press .
5 Check the entry and then press the .
6 Make sure [Register To Address Book]
is selected and then press .
7 Repeat step 4 to 9 in "Registering and
Editing".
The e-mail address is automatically entered. You
do not have to enter it manually.
Deleting
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Address Book]
and then press .
3 Check that [E-mail Address] is selected
and then press .
4 Press the to select an entry number
and then press .
5 Press the to select [Delete] and then
press .
6 Press the or to select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen and then press .
Note
You cannot delete an e-mail address which is specified in
Auto Delivery function.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Registering Address Book
-120-
Group List
You can create up to 20 groups of e-mail addresses.
Registering and Editing
Reference
For details on how to enter text, refer to "Entering Text
Using the Operator Panel" P. 27.
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Address Book]
and then press .
3 Press the to select [E-mail Group]
and then press .
4 Press the to select a group number
and then press .
5 Check that [Register] is selected and
then press .
If editing registered group numbers, select [Edit].
6 Check that [Name] is selected and then
press the .
7 Enter a name up to 16 characters.
8 Select [Enter] and then press .
9 Press the to select [Address
Number] and then press .
10
Press the to select the desired e-mail address
from the address book and then press .
The check box is selected. You can select multiple entries.
11 When you have selected all the desired
e-mail addresses, press the .
12 Check that [Complete] is selected and
then press .
13 Press .
Memo
You can also register the e-mail group from [Group
No] in [E-mail Address].
Deleting
1 Press the <SETTING> key.
2 Press the to select [Address Book]
and then press .
3 Press the to select [E-mail Group]
and then press .
4 Press the to select a group number
and then press .
5 Press the to select [Delete] and then
press .
6 Press the or to select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen and then press .
Register all E-mail addresses
All contents of the E-mail Address Book can be
registered by using Configuration Tool. For setting
up of Configuration Tool, see User's Manual
(Advanced), "7. Useful Software".
Registering the Machine
When using the Configuration Tool or introducing a new
machine, register the machine in the Configuration Tool.
1 Select [Start], [All Programs]>
[Okidata]>[Configuration Tool]>
[Configuration Tool].
2
Select [
Register Device
] from the [
Tools
] menu.
Search results are displayed.
3
Select the machine and click on [
Register
].
4
On the confirmation screen, click on [
Yes
].
Importing Addresses from a File
1 Select from which device to import, from
[Registered Device Table].
2 Select the [User Setting] tab.
3 Click on [E-mail Address Manager].
4
Enter the administrator password and click [
OK
].
5 Click .
6 Select [Open] from [Select CSV File].
7
Select the file you want to import and click on [
Open
].
8 Click on [Next].
9
Select the settings to import and click [
Import
].
10 Click .
Memo
CSV files exported by Outlook Express (Windows email and
Windows Live email) can also be restored.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Registering Network Scan Destinations
-121-
Scanning
4
Registering Network Scan Destinations
This section explains how to register a PC connected to the Network.
You can register locations on a network to which you can scan documents.
Memo
You can also register network-connected PCs with ActKey in Network Configuration. You can register or delete network-
connected PCs with Network Configuration; however, you cannot edit them. For details, refer to User's Manual Advanced.
Registering and Editing
Reference
For details on how to enter text, refer to "Entering Text
Using the Operator Panel" P. 27.
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Network Scan
Destination] and then press .
3 Press the to select an IP address or
domain name and then press .
4 Check that [Register] is selected and
then press .
If editing registered numbers, select [Edit].
5 Check that [Destination] is selected
and then press .
6 Enter a destination.
A destination up to 16 characters.
7 Select [Enter] and then press .
8 Press the to select [Destination
Address] and then press .
9 Enter an IP address or a Host PC name.
An IP address or a name up to 64 characters.
10 Select [Enter] and then press .
11 Press the to select [Port No.] and
then press .
12 Enter a port number and then press .
13 Press .
14 Press the until the top screen is
displayed.
Deleting
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Network Scan
Destination] and then press .
3 Press the to select a number and then
press .
4 Press the to select [Delete] and then
press .
5 Press the or to select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen and then press .
6 Press the until the top screen is
displayed.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
-122-
5. Using as a Printer
This chapter describes how to print documents from a computer or USB memory.
Printing from a Computer
This section explains how to print from a computer.
Memo
This section uses Wordpad in Windows and TextEdit in Mac OS X as examples. The display and procedure may differ according
to the operating system, the applications, and the version of the printer driver you are using.
For additional information on the setting items on the printer driver, refer to its online help.
Printing
1 Open the file you want to print from an
application.
2 Configure the print settings on the
printer driver screen and start printing.
The following explains how to configure the paper
size, the paper source, and the media weight on
each printer driver you are using. For how to set
by each printer driver, refer to the following
instructions.
For Windows PCL/PCL XPS Printer
Driver
1 From the [File] menu of an application,
select [Print].
2 Select the printer driver you want to use.
3 Click [Preferences].
4 On the [Setup] tab, select a paper size
from [Size].
5 Select a tray from [Source].
6 Select a media weight from [Weight].
7 Click [OK].
8 Click [Print].
For Windows PS Printer Driver
1
From the [File] menu, select [Print] to
open the print dialog.
2 Select the printer driver you want to use.
3 Click [Preferences].
Printing from a Computer
-123-
Using as a Printer
5
4 Select the [Paper/Quality] tab.
5 Select a tray from [Paper Source].
6 Click [Advanced].
7 Click [Paper Size] and select a paper
size from the drop-down list.
8 Click [Media Type] and select the media
type from the drop-down list.
9 Click [OK].
10 Click [OK].
11 Click [Print].
For Mac OS X PS Printer Driver
1 From the [File] menu, select [Page
Setup].
2 Select the printer you want to use from
[Format For].
3 Select a paper size from [Paper Size]
and then click [OK].
4 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
5 Select [Paper Feed] from the panel
menu.
Memo
If the print dialog contains only two menus and does
not contain the options you expect to see, click the
[Show Details] button for Mac OS X 10.7 and 10.8,
or click the disclosure triangle beside the [Printer]
menu for Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6.
6 Select a tray on the [Paper Feed] panel.
7 Select [Printer Features] from the
panel menu.
8 Select [Insert Options] from [Features
Sets].
9 Select a media type from [Media Type].
Printing from a Computer
-124-
10 Click [Print].
For Mac OS X PCL Printer Driver
1
From the [
File
] menu, select [
Page Setup
].
2 Select the printer you want to use from
[Format For].
3 Select a paper size from [Paper Size]
and then click [OK].
4 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
5 Select [Setup] from the panel menu.
Memo
If the print dialog contains only two menus and does not
contain the options you expect to see, click the [Show
Details] button for Mac OS X 10.7 and 10.8, or click the
disclosure triangle beside the [Printer] menu for Mac OS
X 10.5 and 10.6.
6 Select a tray from the [Paper Source].
7 Select a media type from the [Media
Weight] .
8 Click [Print].
Memo
For general use, [Printer Setting] suffices for a paper
weight. When you select [Printer Setting], the paper
weight setting configured on the equipment setting menu
at the operator panel of the machine is applied.
Reference
If you select [Auto] for a paper source, the tray with the
designated paper type is automatically selected. For
details on the automatic selection of trays, refer to the
User's Manual Advanced.
If you select the MP tray for a paper source, the paper must
be loaded in the MP tray. For details on how to load paper in
the MP tray, refer to "Loading Paper on the MP Tray (MB451/
MB451w/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)" on P. 34
.
Canceling a Print Job
You can cancel a print job from a computer by
deleting the job in the job list from the operator
panel.
1 Press the <PRINT> key on the operator
panel to open the print menu.
2 Make sure [Job Lists] is selected and
then press .
3 Press the to select the job you want to
cancel and then press .
4 Make sure [Cancel] is selected and then
press .
5 Press the or on the confirmation
screen to select [Yes] and then press .
Note
Pages that are ready to be printed on the machine are
printed without change.
If the display indicating that data is being printed on the
operator panel remains for a long time, delete the print job
on the computer.
OK
OK
OK
OK
Printing From USB Memory
-125-
Using as a Printer
5
Printing From USB Memory
This section explains how to print from the USB memory. Inserting the USB memory into the machine,
you can print documents stored in it directly.
Not all USB memory products are guaranteed to work. (USB memory with security functions is not supported.)
USB hubs and external USB HDDs are not supported.
Encrypted PDF is not supported.
Memo
The following file systems are supported: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32.
The following file formats are supported: JPEG, PDF (v1.7), M-TIFF (v6 Baseline), PRN (PCL, PS).
Up to 32 GB capacity of USB memory is supported.
Up to 100 files in supported file formats stored in USB memory are displayed on the file list.
- If more files are stored in USB memory, the list of the stored files may not be displayed properly.
- USB memory with a directory structure of 20 or more levels may not be read properly.
- Files path exceeding 240 characters may not be read correctly.
You can select and print one file in your USB memory at a time.
Starting a Print Job
1 Insert the USB memory into the USB
port on the machine.
Note
Insert the USB memory straight into the USB port. If
the USB memory is inserted at an angle, it may
damage the USB port.
2 Press the <PRINT> key on the operator
panel to open the print menu.
3 Press the to select the [Print From
USB Memory] and then press .
4 Check that [Select Print File] is
selected and then press .
If a file to be printed is not stored in the folder,
proceed to step 7.
5 Press the to select the folder with the
file to print in it and then press .
6 Press the to select [Open folder.] and
then press .
Repeat step 5 and 6 until the file to print is
displayed.
Memo
If [Folder Property] is selected, you can check the
folder information.
7 Press the to print a file and then
press .
8 Press the to select [Select a file] and
then press .
Memo
If [File Property] is selected, you can check the file
information.
9 Perform print settings if necessary.
Reference
"Configuring Print Settings" on P. 126
10 Press to start printing.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
MONO
Printing From USB Memory
-126-
11 Remove the USB memory from the port
after a message is displayed indicating
that it is OK to remove the USB memory.
Configuring Print Settings
You can configure the settings for printing from
USB memory on the [Print Setup] menu.
Perform the following procedure at step 9 of
"Printing From USB Memory" on P. 125 in
"Starting a Print Job".
Changing the Paper Type (Paper
Feed)
You can select the paper source.
When printing a PRN file, the setting of the paper tray
follows the driver settings at the time of file creation.
1 Press the to select [Print Setup] and
then press .
2 Check that [Paper Feed] is selected and
then press .
3 Press the to select the desired value
and then press .
4 Press the to return to the start screen.
Memo
[Tray 2] is displayed only when the second tray unit is
installed as an option.
Changing the Number of Copies
(Copies)
You can set the number of copies to print.
1 Press the to select [Print Setup] and
then press .
2 Press the to select [Copies] and then
press .
3
Enter a number of copies and then press
.
You can enter 1 to 999.
4 Press the to return to the start screen.
Doing Duplex Printing (Duplex)
You can make 1-sided (simplex) or 2-sided
(duplex) printouts.
Note
When printing a PRN file, setting of double-sided printing
follows the driver settings at the time of file creation.
1 Press the to select [Print Setup] and
then press .
2 Press the to select [Duplex] and then
press .
3 Press the to select [ON] for duplex
printing or [OFF] for simplex printing
and then press .
4 Press the to return to the start screen.
Setting the Binding Position (Binding)
You can select the binding position of duplex
printouts.
1 Press the to select [Print Setup] and
then press .
2 Press the to select [Binding] and
then press .
3 Press the to select [Long edge bind]
to bind at the long edge of the paper or
[Short edge bind] to bind at the short
edge of the paper and then press .
4 Press the to return to the start screen.
Reference
For details on long edge binding and short edge binding,
refer to "Making Duplex Copies (Duplex Copy)" on P. 83.
Fitting Pages (Fit)
You can match the page size to the paper size
when printing.
If the page size of a file to print is larger or
smaller than the effective print area, the page
size is resized to fit the paper size.
Note
When printing a PRN file, these settings do not work.
Memo
This function is set to [ON] by default.
1 Press the to select [Print Setup] and
then press .
Selectable Paper Tray Values:
Tray 1* Tray 2 MP Tray
*indicates the factory default.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Printing From USB Memory
-127-
Using as a Printer
5
2 Press the to select [Fit] and then
press .
3 Press the to select [ON] for matching
the paper size or [OFF] for not resizing
the page size and then press .
4 Press the to return to the start screen.
Canceling a Print Job
You can cancel a print job from the USB memory
by pressing the <STOP> key on the operator
panel.
Printing will stop while a message is displayed
saying that printing is finished.
1 Press the <STOP> key on the operator
panel.
Pages that are ready to be printed on the machine are
printed without change.
OK
OK
-128-
6. User Authentication and Access
Control
This chapter explains the user authentication and access control functions.
About User Authentication and Access Control
The user authentication and access control functions allow you to limit the functions available to each
user. If the access control is enabled, the user authentication is required before using the machine. If
the authentication succeeds, only functions specified in advanced can be used.
Your machine has the following two methods of user authentication:
PIN (personal identification number)
User name and password
To control access to the machine, register a PIN (personal identification number) or a user name and
password to each user in advance. You can register up to 100 PINs and 100 sets of user name and
password.
If the access control is enabled, according to the setting, the user must enter the PIN or the user name
and password to log into the machine or to print from a computer.
Access control can be applied to the following functions:
Copying
Faxing
Scanning to e-mail
Scanning to USB memory
Scanning to network PC
Printing
Printing from USB Memory
Scanning to internetFax
Scanning to FaxServer
Settings for sending faxes also apply to sending faxes from a computer.
The following conditions are required to enable the user authentication and access control functions:
Configuration Tool on Network/USB connected computers (PIN/Username and password)
Website (PIN)
Reference
For details on Configuration Tool, refer to the User's Manual Advanced.
Authentication by PIN
-129-
User Authentication and Access Control
6
Authentication by PIN
This section explains how to enable the access control using the authentication by PIN and how to
operate when the access control is enabled.
Registering a PIN
Before enabling the user authentication and
access control, be sure to register a PIN for each
user. You must be the administrator to register
PINs.
To register a PIN, launch PIN Manager from
Configuration Tool.
Reference
For details on how to register a PIN from Configuration
Tool, refer to the User's Manual Advanced.
Memo
You can also register a PIN from a web browser or Print
Job Accounting.
Enabling Access Control
You must be the administrator to control access
to the machine.
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
The default password is "aaaaaa".
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Management]
and then press .
6 Press to select [System Setup] and
then press .
7 Check that [Access Control] is selected
and then press .
8 Press the to select [PIN] and then
press .
9 Press the until the message of "Access
Control has been enabled." is displayed.
Operation When PIN
Authentication Is Enabled
Logging Into the Machine
For General Users
1 Enter your PIN No. using the ten-key pad
on the operator panel.
2 Press .
If authentication succeeds, the top screen
appears.
For the Administrator
1 Enter "000000" using the ten-key pad on
the operator panel.
The PIN No. of the administrator is "000000". You
cannot change the value.
2 Press .
3 When the password entry screen
appears, enter the administrator
password.
The default password is "aaaaaa".
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
If authentication succeeds, the top screen
appears.
Logging Out of the Machine
When you have finished operations, be sure to
log out of the machine.
1 Press the until the top screen appears.
2 Press the <RESET/LOG OUT> key on
the operator panel.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Authentication by PIN
-130-
3 Press the or on the confirmation
screen to select [Yes] and then press .
Memo
After a certain period of time, the machine automatically
logs out users.
Operation From a Computer
To control access to operations from a computer,
you need to install Print Job Accounting Client on
the computer in advance.
Memo
The authentication type specified on the computer
overrides the one specified on the machine.
Reference
For details on Print Job Accounting, refer to the User's
Manual Advanced.
Printing (for Windows)
Memo
This procedure uses NotePad and PCL driver as an
example. The procedures and menus may differ depending
on the OS you use.
1 Click [Start] > [All Programs] >
[Okidata] > [Print Job Accounting
Client] > [Change Job Accounting
Mode].
On the [User Account Control] window, click
[Yes]. (Click [Continue] for Windows Vista.)
2 Select the printer driver you want in
[Driver].
3 Select the [Tab] check box and then
click [Change].
4 Click [OK].
5 From the [File] menu, select [Close].
6 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
7 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printer properties] > [OKI
MB491(*)].
* Select the type of driver you want.
8 Select the [Job Accounting] tab.
9 Enter the user name in [User Name]
and the PIN in [Job Account ID].
10 Click [OK].
11 Open the file you want to print.
12 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
13 Select the printer driver you selected in
step 7 and then click [Print].
Printing (For Mac OS X PS Driver)
Memo
This procedure uses Text Edit as an example. The
procedures and menus may differ depending on the OS
you use.
1 Put the Software DVD-ROM into the
computer.
2 Double click on the [OKI] icon on your
desktop.
3 Double-click on [Utilities].
4 Copy the [Print Job Accounting
Client] folder by dragging and dropping
to your Applications folder.
5 Open the [Print Job Accounting
Client] folder you opened, and double
click on [Print Job Accounting Client].
6 Click [New].
7 Enter the username into [UserName]
and enter the PIN into
[JobAccountingID].
8 Click [Save].
OK
Authentication by PIN
-131-
User Authentication and Access Control
6
9 Click [Save].
10 If a message is displayed asking you to
input the user password, enter the
password and click [OK].
11 Open the file to print.
12 Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
13 Select your machine and click [Print].
Printing (for Max OS X PCL Driver)
1 From the [File] menu of an application,
select [Print].
2 Select the [Job Options] panel.
3 Press the [Advanced] button.
4 Enter the user name into [User Name],
and enter the PIN into [Job Account ID].
5 Click [OK].
6 Click [Print].
Sending Faxes from Your Computer
(Windows only)
Memo
In the following procedure, Notepad is used as an
example. The items here may differ depending on the
application you are using.
1 Click [Start] > [All Programs]
[Okidata] > [Print Job Accounting
Client] > [Change Job Accounting
Mode].
On the [User Account Control] window, click
[Yes].
2 Select the printer driver you want in
[Driver].
3 Select the [Tab] check box and then
click [Change].
4 Click [OK].
5 From the [File] menu, select [Close].
6 Click [Start] and select [Devices and
Printers].
7 Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and
select [Printer properties] > [OKI
MB491(*)].
8 Select the [Job Accounting] tab.
9 Enter the user name in [User Name]
and the PIN in [Job Account ID].
10 Click [OK].
11 Open the file you want to fax.
12 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
13 Select the printer driver you selected in
step 7 and then click [Print].
Reference
For details on how to send a fax from a computer,
refer to the User's Manual Advanced.
Authentication by User Name and Password
-132-
Authentication by User Name and Password
This section explains how to enable the access control using the authentication by the user name and
password and how to operate when the access control is enabled.
Registering User Name and
Password
Before enabling user authentication and access
control, be sure to register a user name and a
password for each user. You must be the
administrator to register user names and
passwords.
To register a user name and password, launch
PIN Manager from Configuration Tool.
Reference
For details on how to register a user name and password
from Configuration Tool, refer to the User's Manual
Advanced.
Enabling Access Control
You must be the administrator to control access
to the machine.
1 Press the <SETTING> key on the
operator panel.
2 Press the to select [Admin Setup]
and then press .
3 Enter the administrator password.
The default password is "aaaaaa".
4 Select [Enter] and then press .
5 Press the to select [Management]
and then press .
6 Press the to select [System Setup]
and then press .
7 Check that [Access Control] is selected
and then press .
8 Press the to select [User/Password]
and then press .
9 Press the to select [User
Authentication Method] and then
press .
10 Check that [Local] is selected and then
press .
Reference
When you select [LDAP] or [Secure Protocol], the
server settings are necessary. For details, refer to the
User's Manual Advanced.
11 Press the until the message of "Access
Control has been enabled." is displayed.
Operation When User Name and
Password Authentication is Enabled
Logging Into the Machine
1 Check that [User Name] is selected and
then press the .
2 Enter your name.
3 Select [Enter] and then press .
4 Check that [Password] is selected and
then press the .
5 Enter your password.
6 Select [Enter] and then press .
7 Press on the [Login] screen, press .
If authentication succeeds, the top screen
appears.
Reference
For details on how to enter text, refer to "Entering Text
Using the Operator Panel" on P. 27.
Logging Out of the Machine
When you have finished operations, be sure to
log out of the machine.
1 Press the until the top screen appears.
2 Press the <RESET/LOG OUT> key on
the operator panel.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Authentication by User Name and Password
-133-
User Authentication and Access Control
6
3 Press the or on the confirmation
screen to select [Yes] and then press .
Memo
After a certain period of time, the machine automatically
logs out users.
Operation From the Computer
Memo
The authentication type specified on the computer
overrides the one specified on the machine.
Printing (for Windows)
You cannot use the PCL XPS printer driver for this function.
Memo
This procedure uses NotePad and PCL driver as an
example. The procedures and menus may differ depending
on the OS you use.
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select the printer driver you want in
[Select Printer] and click [Preferences].
4 Select the [Job Options] tab.
5 Click [User Auth].
6 Select the [Use User Authentication]
check box.
7 Enter the user name in [Username] and
the password in [Password].
Clicking [Use Windows Login] automatically
enters your login name on Windows.
8 Click [OK].
9 Click [OK] and then click [Print].
Printing (for Mac OS X)
Memo
This procedure uses Text Edit as an example. The
procedures and menus may differ depending on the OS
you use.
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select your machine's printer driver.
4 Select [User Authentication] from the
panel menu.
5 Select the [Use User Authentication]
check box.
6 Enter the user name in [User Name]
and the password in [Password].
7 Click [Print].
OK
Authentication by User Name and Password
-134-
Faxing From a Computer
(For Windows Only)
Memo
This procedure uses NotePad as an example. The
procedures and menus may differ depending on the OS
you use.
1 Open the file you want to fax.
2 From the [File] menu, select [Print].
3 Select your machine's fax driver in
[Select Printer] and click [Preferences].
4 On the [Setup] tab, click [User
Authentication].
5 Select the [Use User Authentication]
check box.
6 Enter the user name in [Username] and
the password in [Password].
Clicking [Use Windows Login] automatically
enters your login name on Windows.
7 Click [OK].
8 Click [OK] and then click [Print].
Reference
For details on how to send a fax from a computer,
refer to the User's Manual Advanced.
-135-
Troubleshooting
7
7. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions to the problems you may encounter while operating your machine.
Paper Jams
This section explains how to clear paper jams.
Reference
For details on the location of each component of the machine, refer to "Cleaning Your Machine" on P. 176.
For details on the location of each component of the machine, refer to "Names of Components" on P. 15.
Checking Error Messages
When a paper jam occurs, the [Paper jam] or
[Document jam] message appears on the
display screen and the <STATUS> key on the
operator panel blinks. The error code and
description differ according to where the paper
jam occurs.
Check the error code that appears from the list
below and refer to the relevant procedure to
clear paper jams.
Clearing Paper Jams
Note
Check that there is no paper remaining inside the
machine.
Remove the paper carefully so that it does not tear. If the
paper tears, be sure to remove all of the pieces.
Note
The image drum (the green tube) is very delicate. Handle
it carefully.
Do not expose the image drum to direct sunlight or very
bright interior light (approximately more than 1500 lux).
Even under the normal interior light, do not leave it for
more than 5 minutes.
Error Code 370, 371, 372 (Duplex
paper jam)
1
Remove any documents from the
document tray.
2 Open the scanner unit.
3 Press the top cover open button(1) and
open the top cover.
Error
code
Message
Reference
page
370 Paper Jam Occurs: 3##
Open the scanner unit and top
cover, and check.
Please see Help for details.
P. 1 3 5
371 P. 1 3 5
372 P. 1 3 5
380 P. 1 3 7
381 P. 1 3 7
382 P. 1 3 7
389 P. 1 3 7
390 P. 1 3 8
391 Paper Jam Occurs: 3##
Pull out the paper cassette of the
indicated tray and check.
Please see Help for details.
P. 1 3 9
392 P. 1 3 9
Document Jam Occurs.
Please open the scanner unit and ADF
cover, and check.
Please see Help for details.
P. 1 4 0
Possible to get burned.
Since the fuser unit right is extremely hot,
perform the operation with care.
CAUTION
1
Paper Jams
-136-
4
Carefully lift out the image drum, complete
with the toner cartridge. Be careful not to
touch or scratch the green drum surface.
5 Remove the Image Drum as described in
step 3, then, remove the Duplex unit (1)
by raising the coloured handles (2) on
each side, and then by holding the
handles and gently lifting it out.
6
Remove any paper and replace the duplex unit.
Check that there is no paper remaining inside the machine.
Remove the paper carefully so that it does not tear. If the
paper tears, be sure to remove all of the pieces.
7 When you return the transcription unit
into the printer, insert both projections
(A) of the front end of transcription unit
into holders of the printer.
8 Insert rear projections , located close
to both handles of the transcription unit,
into both mounting holes of the printer.
9 Secure the transcription unit to the
printer by rotating both handles of the
transcription unit in the direction of the
arrow of
.
Note
Do not touch the sponge roller of the transcription unit by
your hand.
10 Re-install the image drum complete with
toner cartridge, ensuring that the pegs
(1 & 2) correctly locate into the slots on
each side of the printer (3).
Note
Check that there is no paper remaining inside the machine.
Remove the paper carefully so that it does not tear. If the
paper tears, be sure to remove all of the pieces.
11 Close the top cover.
12 Close the scanner unit.
Paper Jams
-137-
Troubleshooting
7
Error Code 380, 381, 382, 389
(Paper feed jam)
1 Remove any documents from the
document tray.
2 Open the scanner unit.
3 Press the top cover open button (1) and
open the top cover.
4 Carefully lift out the image drum,
complete with the toner cartridge. Be
careful not to touch or scratch the green
drum surface.
5 If the top end of paper is visible at the
rear side of transparent resist guide,
rotate the resist guide toward the fuser
unit and hold the paper top end and
carefully pull out the paper.
If neither the top or bottom end of paper
is visible, move the jammed paper in the
arrow direction as shown. Hold the top
end of paper with your hands and
carefully pull out the paper.
If the bottom end of paper is visible, hold
the paper by your hands and carefully
pull out the paper.
Note
Check that there is no paper remaining inside the machine.
Remove the paper carefully so that it does not tear. If the
paper tears, be sure to remove all of the pieces.
Paper discharge unit (Paper jammed)
If the bottom end of paper is visible in the
printer, hold and pull out the paper
carefully.
Note
If paper jams at the paper discharge unit and if the paper
is visible inside of the top cover, pull out the paper toward
the inside of the printer.
If the bottom end of paper is not visible
but its top end is visible at the paper
discharge unit, hold the top end of paper
and pull out the paper carefully. If you
cannot remove the paper by following
1
Paper Jams
-138-
Steps (A)1 and (A)2, pull out the paper by
following Steps (B).
If you have failed to remove jammed
paper, do not force to pull out the paper
but follow the steps below.
Return the image drum cartridge into the
printer, and close the top cover.
Turn the printer Power switch OFF (O) first,
and then turn it ON (I) again. When the motor
starts to rotate, hold the top end of paper and
pull out the paper.
If paper jams when you load it, check to see that no paper
has been left in the paper feed units. Remember that you
can release the alarm display only after you have opened
the top cover first and then closed it again.
6 Re-install the image drum complete with
toner cartridge, ensuring that the pegs
(1 & 2) correctly locate into the slots on
each side of the printer (3).
Check that there is no paper remaining inside the machine.
Remove the paper carefully so that it does not tear. If the
paper tears, be sure to remove all of the pieces.
7 Close the top cover.
8 Close the scanner unit.
Error Code 390 (Paper feed jam
(Multipurpose tray))
1 Remove any documents from the
document tray.
2 Open the scanner unit.
3 Press the top cover open button (1) and
open the top cover.
4 Carefully lift out the image drum,
complete with the toner cartridge. Be
careful not to touch or scratch the green
drum surface.
5 If the top end of paper is visible at the
rear side of transparent resist guide,
rotate the resist guide toward the fuser
unit and hold the paper top end and
carefully pull out the paper.
(B)1 (B)2
(A)1 (A)2
Paper Jams
-139-
Troubleshooting
7
If neither the top or bottom end of paper
is visible, move the jammed paper in the
arrow direction as shown. Hold the top
end of paper by your hands and carefully
pull out the paper.
If the bottom end of paper is visible, hold
the paper with your hands and carefully
pull out the paper.
Check that there is no paper remaining inside the machine.
Remove the paper carefully so that it does not tear. If the
paper tears, be sure to remove all of the pieces.
6 Re-install the image drum complete with
toner cartridge, ensuring that the pegs
(1 & 2) correctly locate into the slots on
each side of the printer (3).
7 Close the top cover.
8 Close the scanner unit.
Error Code 391, 392 (Paper feed jam)
Error Code 391 indicates an error in Tray1 and
Error Code 392 indicates a paper jam in Tray2.
Memo
The following procedure uses tray 1 as an example.
1 Pull out and remove the paper cassette
of the indicated tray.
2 Remove jammed paper.
3 Return the tray into the machine.
4 Open the scanner unit.
5 Press the top cover open button (1) and
open the top cover.
6 Close the top cover.
7 Close the scanner unit.
1
Paper Jams
-140-
Document Jam
When you can see the document In
the Duplex Paper Path
1 Open the ADF cover, and pull the
document out upward.
When you can see the document
Inside the ADF
1 Remove any documents from the
document tray.
2 Open the ADF cover.
3 Hold the jammed document by the top
edge, and gently pull it out.
If the edge of the document can been seen under
the paper guide (1), lift the paper guide and then
pull out the document.
If the edge of the document cannot be seen in the
ADF, lift the document tray (2) and then pull out
the document.
Pull down the document tray.
4 Close the ADF cover.
1
2
Error Messages
-141-
Troubleshooting
7
Error Messages
This section explains the causes and remedies for the error messages displayed on the display screen
and the function of the <STATUS> key.
Error Messages Displayed on the Screen
Memo
In the following lists:
- "%COLOR%" indicates K (black)
- "%TRAY%" indicates tray 1, tray 2 or the MP tray
- "%ERRCODE%" indicates an error code
- "%FS_ERR%", "%CODE%", and "%FATALSTRING1%" indicate detailed information on errors
- "%MEDIA_SIZE%" indicates paper size
- "%MEDIA_TYPE%" indicates a paper type
- "%COVER%" indicates Top Cover or Rear Cover.
If the displayed message includes "Please see Help for details", you can check countermeasures for the error by pressing the
<?HELP> key on the operator panel.
If in the displayed message there is " to Close", press on the control plan to remove the error.
Reference
For details on the function of the <STATUS> key, refer to "Checking the Machine's Status From the <STATUS> Key" on P. 152.
General Error Messages for All Functions
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
Inspection is required.
PU Flash Error
Blinks Firmware error has occurred.
Contact your dealer.
Inspection is required.
PU Communication Error
Blinks Firmware error has occurred.
Contact your dealer.
%COLOR% Toner Low.
Please see Help for details.
Lights
up*
The toner cartridge of the indicated color is low.
Prepare a new toner cartridge.
*If the <SETTING> key > [Admin Setup] > [Device Man-
agement] > [System setup] > [Near life LED] is set to
[Disable], the <STATUS> key does not turn on.
Image Drum Unit Near Life.
Please see Help for details.
Lights up*
The Image Drum Unit is near the end of its life.
Prepare a replacement image drum.
*If the <SETTING> key >[Admin Setup] > [Device Man-
agement] > [System setup] > [Near Life Status] is set to
[Enable] and [Near life LED] is set to [Disable], the <STA-
TUS> key does not turn on.
If [Near Life Status] is set to [Disable], this message is not
displayed and the <STATUS> key does not turn on.
413 %COLOR% Toner Empty
%ERRCODE%
Please see Help for details.
Blinks The toner cartridge of the indicated color is
empty.
Replace it with a new toner cartridge.
413 : K
%COLOR% Toner Empty
Please see Help for details.
Lights up The toner cartridge of the indicated color is
empty.
Replace it with a new toner cartridge.
OK
OK
Error Messages
-142-
613 %COLOR% Toner cartridge not
installed. : %ERRCODE%
Please see Help for details.
Blinks The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not
properly installed.
Reinstall it properly.
613 : K
%COLOR% Toner cartridge not installed.
Please see Help for details.
Lights up The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not
properly installed.
Reinstall it properly.
%TRAY% Empty.
Please see Help for details.
Lights up The indicated tray is empty.
Load paper in the tray.
File System is full.
Please see Help for details.
Lights up The file system is full.
File System is
w
rite
p
rotected.
Please see Help for details.
Lights up The file system to which you tried to write is
write-protected.
Memory Overflow.
Please see Help for details.
to Close
Blinks The memory has overflowed.
If you are performing other tasks simultaneously,
finish them and try again. If this does not work,
reduce the print resolution.
420 Memory Overflow. : 420
Please see Help for details.
to Close
Blinks The memory has overflowed.
Reduce the print resolution. If this does not
work, reduce the size of the print data.
Access
Limit
ation Error
Deleted unauthorized user data.
Please see Help for details.
to Close
Lights up The machine deleted a job of an unauthorized
user.
Accounting Log Buffer is near full.
Please see Help for details.
Lights up The job accounting log buffer is nearly full.
Accounting Log Buffer Full (Delete old logs) Lights up Delete old accounting logs because the account-
ing log buffer is full.
Accounting Log Writing Error
Please see Help for details.
to Close
Lights up A job accounting log writing error has occurred.
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
OK
OK
OK
OK
Error Messages
-143-
Troubleshooting
7
Disk Use Failed %FS_ERR%
Please see Help for details.
to Close
Blinks A disk operation error has occurred.
Please check data.
Message Data Write Error : %CODE%.
Lights up Failure to write message data to be uploaded.
Contact your dealer.
Please check %COLOR% Toner Cartridge.
Please see Help for details.
Lights up Something is wrong with the toner sensor of the
indicated color during printing.
Check that the toner cartridge of the indicated
color is installed properly.
543 Please check %COLOR% Toner Cartridge. :
%ERRCODE%
Please see Help for details.
Blinks Something is wrong with the toner sensor of the
indicated color.
Check that the toner cartridge of the indicated
color is installed properly.
543 : K
547 Please check %COLOR% Toner Cartridge. :
%ERRCODE%
Please see Help for details.
Blinks The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not
locked properly.
Check that the lock lever is properly slid to the
left.
547 : K
372
380
381
382
389
390
Paper Jam: %ERRCODE%
Please open the scanner unit and the top
cover.
Please see Help for details.
Blinks Paper jam has occurred.
Remove the jammed paper.
Error 372 : Misfeed from Duplex
Error 380 : Paper Feed
Error 381 : Transport
Error 382 : Exit
Error 389 : Printing Page Lost
Error 390 : MP Tray
Error 390 : MANUAL
391
392
Paper Jam: %ERRCODE%
Please pull out the paper cassette of the
indicated tray.
Please see Help for details.
Blinks Paper jam occurred while feeding paper from the
indicated tray.
Remove the jammed paper.
391 : Tray1
392 : Tray2
310
587
Please check the %COVER%.: %ERRCODE%
Please close the %COVER%.
Please see Help for details.
Blinks The top cover is open.
Close the top cover.
310 : Top Cover
587 : Rear Cover
ADF Cover Open
Please see Help for details.
Blinks The ADF cover is open.
Close the ADF cover.
Power OFF/ON
%ERRCODE%: Error
Blinks An error has occurred in the device.
Turn the machine off and then on again.
If the error is not resolved, contact your dealer.
Inspection is required.
%ERRCODE: Error
Blinks An error has occurred in the device.
Contact your dealer.
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
OK
Error Messages
-144-
Power OFF/ON
%ERRCODE%: Error %FATALSTRING1%
Blinks An error has occurred in the device.
Turn the machine off and then on again.
If the same error occurs, turn the machine off
and then on again. If the error is not resolved, or
the same error occurs again, contact your dealer.
Document Jam
Please open the scanner unit and the ADF
cover.
Please see Help for details.
Blinks A document jam has occurred.
Open the ADF cover, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Lamp Error. Please call service.
<%CODE%>
Please see Help for details.
Blinks Indicates that a lamp error has occurred.
This message is displayed because of the light
intensity of the lamp is weak.
Contact your dealer.
%TRAY% missing.
Please see Help for details.
Lights up A paper cassette is not in the indicated tray.
Insert the paper cassette into the indicated tray.
If the cassette is already inserted in the machine,
pull out the cassette and set it again to correctly
locate it.
430
440
Please close %TRAY%.: 430,440
To cancel, select [Cancel]
Blinks A paper cassette is not in the indicated tray.
Insert the paper cassette into the indicated tray.
If the cassette is already inserted in the machine,
pull out the cassette and set it again to correctly
locate it.
Inspection is required.
%ERRCODE%: SIP Error
Blinks Processing of scanned image has failed.
Turn the machine off and then on again.
If the error is not resolved, contact your dealer.
Please call service.
Scanner unit failed to detect printer unit.
Blinks An error has occurred between the scanner and
printer units.
Turn the machine off and then on again.
If the error is not resolved, contact your dealer.
SIP Firmware Missing Blinks A board failure has been detected.
Turn the machine off and then on again.
If the error is not resolved, contact your dealer.
Wait a moment.
Network initializing ...
Lights up Changed network settings are being stored.
085 Please change SD Memory Card.
Error Code: 085
Lights up The contents of the SD memory card cannot be
read normally.
If the same card is used further, the same error
may occur. Replace the SD memory card.
Power OFF/ON
Carriage Error <1>
Please see Help for details.
Blinks Indicates that a carriage error has ocurred.
This message is displayed because of the
scanner carriage is not working normally.
If the error is not resolved, contact your dealer.
Power OFF/ON
Carriage Error <%CODE%>
Blinks Indicates that the following carriage error has
occurred.
2 : Home position error (carriage connection
error)
3 : Scanning start position detection error
If the error is not resolved, contact your dealer.
581 Please close faceup stacker.
581:Cannot print with duplex.
Blinks Although Duplex printing was attempted, the
FaceUp stacker is open and Duplex printing is
disabled.
500 Please install paper on
Manual Feeder. Please set paper
(%MEDIA_SIZE%).
To cancel, select [Cancel]
Blinks Manual paper feed is required. Manually insert
the paper shown by %MEDIA_SIZE%.
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
Error Messages
-145-
Troubleshooting
7
Error Messages for Copying
The following messages are displayed on the display screen of the operator panel while using the copy
function.
Error Messages for Faxing
The following messages are displayed on the display screen of the operator panel while using the fax
function.
400 Paper Size Error
Please open the scanner unit and the top
cover
and check paper size.
Please see Help for details.
Blinks Paper of an improper size is being used.
Check the paper in the tray or check for Multiple-
feed. Open and close the cover to perform
recovery printing, and continue.
347 Please install new Image Drum Unit.
Please see Help for details.
Blinks The Image Drum Unit is at the end of its life.
Decode error occurred.
Please check image data.
to Close
Lights up An error has occurred during analysis of image
data entered from outside of the MFP.
For PrintFromUSBMemory or InternetFAX/
E-mailPrint/FaxToPrint (with communication data
saving), an error has occurred in the TIFF or
JPEG data analysis.
409 Please open the top cover.
409:Faceup Stacker Error
Blinks Because the Face Up stacker was operated during
printing, the printing was stopped and an error
was output.
- Firmware Update Error
Please try again.
If network doesn't work, please try firmware
update over USB.
Lights up This message indicates that the remote FW
update failed.
Scanning function and print function is prohibited.
However, the process of MJL / PJL command is
possible.
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
Offline Mode Lights up
The machine is off line and cannot start a copy job.
Press the <PRINT> key on the operator panel
and then select [Online/Offline] on the print
menu screen.
Do you wish to resume scanning? Lights up Scanning for a copy job was suspended because
an error occurred, but now the error is resolved.
To restart scanning the remaining documents,
set the documents in the ADF and then select
[Yes].
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
Received invalid data.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Lights up The machine received and deleted unauthorized
PC fax data. While the machine received the PC
fax data, the connection with the computer might
be unstable.
Check the connection between the machine and
the computer.
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
OK
OK
Error Messages
-146-
Error Messages for Scanning
The following messages are displayed on the display screen while using the scan function.
Communication Error
to close
Blinks Fax transmission and reception have been
canceled due to errors.
Telep hone
Please see Help for details.
Lights up The telephone is being used.
Wait for the call on the telephone lines to end.
Memory Overflow.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks The memory overflowed while receiving PC fax
data.
Ensure the memory capacity by any of the
following operations.
if the time specification for fax transmission is
set, cancel it.
Delete documents stored in F-code box.
Or this message may be displayed when an error
occurs in the machine. Release the error.
If the error is not resolved, reduce the data to be
transmitted as PC Fax.
Offline Mode Lights up The machine is off line and cannot print received
fax data.
Press the <PRINT> key on the operator panel
and then select [Online/Offline] on the print
menu screen.
Memory Overflow has occurred
during Fax Tx reservation.
to Close
Blinks A memory overflow occurred during fax memory
transmission.
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
Cancelling ... Lights up A ScanTo job is being cancelled.
Cancelling sending ... Lights up An e-mail or file transmission is being cancelled.
Memory Overflow
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks The memory overflowed while scanning data.
USB Memory Full
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks The USB memory is full and cannot store data.
Delete unnecessary files from the USB memory,
or use a USB memory with enough available
space.
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Error Messages
-147-
Troubleshooting
7
Writing Failed
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks Writing to the USB memory has failed.
Remove the write-protection of the connected
USB memory.
USB Memory disconnected.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks USB memory is not connected to the machine
and the machine cannot store data.
Be sure that the USB memory is connected to
the machine properly.
Connect to PC failed.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks The machine has failed to connect to a PC.
Be sure that the machine is connected to the PC
properly.
File Transmission Error
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks A file transmission error has occurred.
Check the network configuration, cable
connection and status, and the server status.
E-mail Transmission Error
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks An e-mail transmission error has occurred.
Check the network configuration, cable
connection and status, and the server status.
Please check SMTP settings.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks An error has occurred while connecting to an
SMTP server.
Check the network configuration, cable
connection and status, and the server status.
Check the SMTP settings.
Please check POP3 settings.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks An error has occurred while connecting to a POP3
server.
Check the network configuration, cable
connection and status, and the server status.
Check the POP3 settings.
SMTP Login failed.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks Login to an SMTP server has failed.
Check the login name and password for the
server.
SMTP Auth. Unsupported
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks The SMTP server does not support authentica-
tion.
POP3 Login failed.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks Login to a POP3 server has failed.
Check the login name and password for the
server.
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Error Messages
-148-
Getting target IP failed.
Please check DHCP Settings.
Please see Help for details.
Blinks The machine could not get IP address from DHCP
server.
Check the network configuration, cable
connection and status, and the server status.
Please check DNS settings.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks An error has occurred while connecting to a DNS
server, or the machine has failed to obtain IP
address.
Check the network configuration, cable
connection and status, and the server status.
Check the DNS settings.
Check the [Target URL] in the profile, and
check that the computer name has been
correctly set.
If there is no DNS server on the network, set
the IP address, not the computer name, in the
profile [Target URL].
If the username is managed from the domain,
input "Username @ Domainname" on
[Username] settings.
Please check Server setting.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks An error has occurred while connecting to a file
server.
Check the network configuration, cable
connection and status, and the server status.
Check the server settings.
If the username is managed from the domain,
input "Username @ Domainname" on
[Username] settings.
Server Login failed.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks Login to file server has failed.
Check the ID and password for the server.
Entering directory failed.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks The machine failed to access the FTP server
directory.
Changing data Transfer Type failed.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks The machine failed to transmit a file to an FTP
server.
Change the data transfer type for the file.
Not authorized to write file.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks The machine failed to write to a file.
Check that the username set on the computer
and the [Username] set on the profile match
one another.
It is possible that the settings are configured to
not allow writing to common folders. Check the
folder shared settings.
Storage Space Full
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks The storage space of the server is full. The
machine failed to write to a file.
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Error Messages
-149-
Troubleshooting
7
Please change File Name.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks A file name was not authorized by the server.
Change the file name.
If using an FTP server to save data with Scan
to Network PC, there are some machines that
cannot be connected correctly due to
mismatching character codes. Change [Host
side Japanese Kanji code]. If using a Mac for
the FTP server, change [Host side Japanese
Kanji code] to [UTF-8].
Device communication protocol not
supported.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks The machine does not support the specified
server.
If using NAS to save data with Scan to Network
PC, in rare cases there are machines that cannot
connect correctly with CIFS. Change the profile
[CIFS Character Set] to [Shift-JIS] from
[UTF-16].
Please check Network Share Name.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Blinks The name of a network shared folder is invalid.
The machine failed to establish a CIFS
connection.
Change the name of the shared folder.
Please remove the connected USB
device.
Unsupported USB device is
connected.
Blinks Indicates that an unsupported USB device has
been connected.
This message will be displayed until the
unsupported USB device disconnected.
Please remove the USB Hub.
USB Hub is connected.
Blinks A USB hub has been connected. This machine
does not support the USB hub.
Disconnect the USB hub.
Access denied to PC.
Please check PC.
to Close
Lights up The PushScan request has been rejected by the
PC.
Wireless startup failed.
Please see Help for details.
Blinks Wireless startup failed.
Restart the device.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
dealer.
This wireless firmware version does
not operate on this device.
Please see Help for details.
Blinks This wireless firmware version does not work on
this device.
Contact your dealer.
Wireless settings are incomplete.
Please see Help for details.
Blinks Wireless is not operating because the settings
are incomplete.
Try the Wireless Network Selection or
automatic settings again.
If this does not solve the problem, initialize the
network settings, and then try the manual
settings or automatic settings again.
Not connected to wireless access
point.
Please see Help for details.
Blinks Not connected to a wireless access point.
Check that the wireless access point power is
switched on.
Check the wireless access point settings, and
then try the Wireless Network Selection or
automatic settings.
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
OK
OK
OK
OK
Error Messages
-150-
Error Messages for Printing
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
Offline Mode Lights up The machine is off line and cannot start a print
job.
Press the <PRINT> key on the operator panel
and then select [Online/Offline] on the print
menu screen.
Error Postscript
to close
Lights up A Postscript error has occurred.
PDF Cache Write Error
to close
Lights up Writing failed while caching a PDF, as there was
no space on the SD card or memory.
Increase the amount of free capacity on the SD
memory card. (MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb only).
Increase the amount of memory (for cases
other than MB491/MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb).
Error PDF
to close
Lights up A methodology error has been detected in a PDF.
Please check whether the PDF file opened
correctly.
Invalid Password
to close
Lights up This is a PDF file with the encryption function
enabled.
When printing an encrypted PDF file, open it in
your computer and then print it.
This document restricts printing to a
valid owner password.
to close
Lights up This is a PDF file with the encryption function
enabled.
When printing an encrypted PDF file, open it in
your computer and then print it.
Deleting data. Lights up Cancelling received data.
Lights up
If a paper jam occurs while the <
SETTING
> key >
[
Admin Setup
] > [
Print Setup
] > [
Print menu
] >
[
Printer Adjust
] > [
Jam Recovery
] is set to
[
Disable
], the remaining print job is cancelled.
Lights up Cancelling data sent by a user who is not
authorized by Print Job Accounting to print.
Deleting encrypted job. Lights up Deleting an encrypted job.
File erasing ... Lights up Erasing a secret file.
Erased Data Full
Please see Help for details.
Blinks Secret files to be erased are full.
Expired Secure Job
Please see Help for details.
to close
Lights up The machine deleted an expired secure job.
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Error Messages
-151-
Troubleshooting
7
Received invalid data.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Lights up The machine deleted an expired secure Job.
500 Please install paper on MP Tray. : 490
Please set paper (%MEDIA_SIZE%)
To cancel, select [Cancel]
Blinks The MP tray is empty.
Load the indicated size paper.
460
461
462
Tray Media Mismatch: %ERRCODE%
Please install paper (%MEDIA_SIZE%
%MEDIA_TYPE%) on %TRAY%.
Blinks The paper size or type in the indicated tray
differs from that specified for the tray.
Load the indicated size or type of paper.
490
491
492
Please install paper on %TRAY%.
: %ERRCODE% Please set paper
(%MEDIA_SIZE%).
To cancel, select [
Cancel
]
Blinks The indicated tray is empty.
Load the indicated size paper.
430
440
Please close %TRAY%.: 430,440
To cancel, select [Cancel]
Blinks A paper cassette of the indicated tray is not in
the machine.
Install the paper cassette.
Access Limitation Error
Data was deleted due
to the printing limitation.
Please see Help for details.
to close
Lights up A print job sent by a user who is not authorized
for printing is deleted.
Warming up. Lights up The machine is warming up, or cooling down.
Wait for a while without turning off the machine.
This is not a malfunction of the machine.
Preparing. Lights up The printer unit is not prepared for printing.
Wait until this message disappears.
Access Limitation Error
Deleted unauthorized user data.
Please see Help for details.
to Close
Lights up Notifies users that jobs have been cancelled
because they are not permitted for printing.
(Related to JobAccount).
Notifies users that jobs have been cancelled
because they are not permitted for PC-Fax.
(Related to JobAccount).
USB Memory disconnected.
Please see Help for details.
to Close
Blinks Indicates that the USB memory has been
extracted.
When a USB memory is extracted all over
ScanToMemory execution, the file saving of
image file is stopped.
Cannot read the file.
to Close
Lights up The PrintFromUSBMemory function has failed to
process due to the failure of destination device or
others.
Cannot open the file.
to Close
Lights up The PrintFromUSBMemory function has failed to
open the specified file.
Error
code
Message
<Status>
key
Cause/Remedy
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Error Messages
-152-
Checking the Machine's Status From the <STATUS> Key
From the <STATUS> key on the operator panel, you can check the status of your machine.
Checking the Trouble Status
The <
STATUS
> key blinks or lights up when any trouble is occurring in your machine. Press it to check the
trouble status.
1 Press the <STATUS> key on the
operator panel to open the status menu.
2 Be sure that [System Status] is
selected and then press .
3 Press the to select the item you want
to check and then press .
Checking the Device and Job Status
You can check the device status, such as the residual life of the consumable items, and job lists from the
<
STATUS
> key.
1 Press the <STATUS> key on the
operator panel to open the status menu.
2 Press the to select [Device
Information] and then press .
3 Press the to select the item you want
to check and then press .
OK
OK
OK
OK
Other Issues
-153-
Troubleshooting
7
Other Issues
This section explains the issues you may encounter while operating your machine and how to solve them.
Unable to Print from a Computer
Memo
If the following information does not solve the trouble, contact your dealer.
For troubles caused by an application, contact the manufacturer of the application.
General Causes
Common to Windows and Mac OS X
For Windows
Cause Remedy Reference
The machine is in sleep mode. Press the <POWER SAVE> key on the operator panel to
enter the standby mode.
If the sleep mode is not used, disable it from the <SET-
TING> key > [Admin Setup] > [User Install] >
[Power Save] > [Sleep].
P. 2 0
The machine is turned off. Hold down the power switch for about a second to turn
on the power.
P. 2 0
An Ethernet or USB cable is unplugged. Check that the cable is plugged into the machine and
computer properly.
-
Something is wrong with a cable. Replace it with a new cable. -
The machine is off line. Press the <PRINT> key on the operator panel, and then
select [On-Line].
-
An error message is displayed on the
display screen of the operator panel.
"Error Messages Displayed on the Screen" on P. 141 or
press the <?HELP> key on the operator panel.
P. 1 4 1
The interface setting is disabled. Check the setting of the interface being used from the
operator panel.
Advanced
Something is wrong with the print
function.
Check if you can perform configuration print. P. 7 8
The LED indicator in the power
switch is blinking at high speed per
about 0.3 second.
The machine may be malfunctioning. Unplug the AC
cord immediately. Contact your dealer
.
-
Cause Remedy Reference
The machine is not set as the default printer.
Set the machine as the default printer. -
The output port for the printer driver is
incorrect.
Select the output port to which the Ethernet or USB
cable is connected.
-
A print job from another interface is in
progress.
Wait until the print job is done. -
[Received invalid data] is displayed on
the display screen and printing cannot be
done.
Press the <SETTING> key and select [Admin Setup] >
[Print Setup] > [Print menu] > [Printer Adjust] >
[Wait Timeout], and then select a longer time. The
default setting is 40 seconds.
-
A print job is automatically canceled. If using Print Job Control, the print job is not authorized
to print, or the Job Accounting log buffer may be full.
Advanced
Other Issues
-154-
Network Connection Problems
Common to Windows and Mac OS X
For Windows
Cause Remedy Reference
The Job Type of "Secure Print", "Store to
HDD" and "Encrypted Secure Print" are
unselectable on the MB491.
For Windows PCL Driver
1.Click [Start] > [Devices and Printers].
2.Right-click the [OKI MB491(PCL)] icon and select
[Printer properties]. (If you have installed multiple
printer drivers, select [Printer properties] > [OKI
MB491(PCL)]).
3.Select the [Device Options] tab.
4.For the network connection, select [Get Printer
Settings].
For the USB connection, add a check to [
SD Memory Card
].
5.Click [OK].
For Windows PS Driver
1.Click [Start] > [Devices and Printers].
2.Right-click the [OKI MB491(PS)] icon and then select
[Printer properties]. (If you have installed multiple
printer drivers, select [Printer properties] > [OKI
MB491(PS)].)
3.Select the [Device Settings] tab.
4.For the network connection, select [Get installed
options automatically] under [Installable Options],
and then click [Setup].
For the USB connection, select [Installed] for [SD
Memory Card] under [Installable Options].
5.Click [OK].
Advanced
Cause Remedy Reference
Using a crossover cable. Use a straight cable. -
The machine is turned on before a cable
was connected.
Connect cables before turning on the machine. P. 4 7
The hub and the machine are incompatible
or have some problem.
Press the <SETTING> key and select [Admin Setup] >
[Network Menu] > [Network Setup] > [HUB Link
Setting], and then select [10BASE-T HALF].
-
The network connection setting is wrong. This product cannot connect to a wired LAN and wireless
LAN at the same time. To connect to a wired network,
set the network connection to wired. To connect to a
wireless network, set the network connection to
wireless.
-
Not connected to a wireless access point. Check that the wireless access point power is switched
on.
Check the wireless access point settings, and then try
the manual settings or automatic settings.
Restart the wireless LAN function.
Press the <
SETTING
> key and select [
Admin Setup
] >
[
Network Menu
] > [
Network Setup
] > [
Wireless
Setting
], and then select [
Reconnect Wireless
].
-
Cause Remedy Reference
IP address is incorrect. Check that the same IP address is set for the machine
and the machine's port setting on the computer.
If using OKI LPR Utility, check the IP address setting in
OKI LPR Utility.
P. 6 5
Other Issues
-155-
Troubleshooting
7
USB Connection Problems
Common to Windows and Mac OS X
For Windows
Unable to Install a Printer Driver Successfully
Memo
If the following information does not solve the trouble, contact your dealer.
For troubles caused by an application, contact the manufacturer of the application.
USB Connection Problems
For Windows
All pages are not printed. If you are using the WSD port, change it to the standard
TCP/IP port.
Cause Remedy Reference
Unsupported USB cable is being used. Use a USB2.0 cable. -
A USB hub is being used. Directly connect the machine to the computer. P. 6 0
Printer driver is not installed correctly. Reinstall printer driver. P. 6 0
Cause Remedy Reference
Cause Remedy Reference
The machine is off line. Right-click the OKI MB491 icon and then select [See
print jobs] (> [OKI MB491(*)] when multiple drivers
are installed). In the dialog box, select the [Printer]
menu and then clear the check of [Use Printer Offline].
* Select the type of driver you want.
-
A switch, buffer, extension cable or USB
hub is being used.
Directly connect the machine to the computer. P.6 0
A printer driver which uses a USB
connection has been installed.
Remove the other printer driver from the computer. -
Cause Remedy Reference
An icon for the machine is not created
on the [Devices and Printers] folder.
The printer driver is not installed correctly.
Reinstall the printer driver correctly.
P. 6 0
Only the first printer driver is installed
even if multiple printer drivers are
selected to install.
Follow the procedure below to install a second and
subsequent printer drivers:
1.Insert the "Software DVD-ROM" into the computer.
2.Click [Run setup.exe] and follow the on-screen
instructions.
3. Select [Custom Installation (Printer)] from
[Driver Installation].
4. Click [Next].
5. Select [Local Printer] and then click [Next].
6. On the [Select printer port] screen, select [FILE]
and then click [Next].
7. Complete the setup following the on-screen
instructions.
-
Other Issues
-156-
Restrictions on Each OS
Restrictions on Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows Server
2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008
Only the first printer driver is installed
even if multiple printer drivers are
selected to install.
8. On the [Devices and Printers], right-click the icon
of the second or later driver and select [Printer
properties] ( [OKI MB491(*)] when multiple driv-
ers are installed).
*Select the type of driver you want.
9. From the [Ports] tab, select [USBxxx] from the list.
10. Click [OK].
-
The [Unable to install printer driver]
error message is displayed.
Use Plug-and-Play. Follow the procedure below:
1. Ensure that the machine and computer are turned off.
2. Connect a USB cable.
3. Hold down the power switch for about a second to
turn on the power.
4. Turn on the computer.
5. When the Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed,
follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup.
For details, refer to [README.TXT] in the "Software
DVD-ROM".
-
Item Symptom Cause/Remedy
Printer drivers [Help] is not displayed. The [Help] function is not supported on PS printer drivers.
The [User Account Control]
dialog appears.
When you launch an installer or utility, the [User Account
Control] dialog may appear. Click [Yes] or [Continue] to
run the installer or utility as an administrator. If you click
[No], the installer or utility does not start.
Network Extension [Help] is not displayed. The [Help] function is not supported.
The [User Account Control]
dialog appears.
When you launch an installer or utility, the [User Account
Control] dialog may appear. Click [Yes] or [Continue] to
run the installer or utility as an administrator. If you click
[No], the installer or utility does not start.
The [Program Capability
Assistant] dialog appears.
If the [Program Capability Assistant] dialog appears after
an installation (including if you stop an installation before it is
completed), make sure to click [This program installed
correctly].
PS Gamma Adjuster The [User Account Control]
dialog appears.
When you launch an installer or utility, the [User Account
Control] dialog may appear. Click [Yes] or [Continue] to
run the installer or utility as an administrator. If you click
[No], the installer or utility does not start.
The [Program Capability
Assistant] dialog appears.
If the [Program Capability Assistant] dialog appears after
an installation (including if you stop an installation before it is
completed), make sure to click [This program installed
correctly].
Cause Remedy Reference
Other Issues
-157-
Troubleshooting
7
Restrictions on Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 and Windows XP Service
Pack 2
Restrictions on Windows Firewall
On Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 and Windows XP Service Pack 2, the Windows firewall
functionality is enhanced. The following restrictions may apply to printer drivers and utilities.
Memo
The following procedures are explained using Windows XP Service Pack 2 as an example. The procedure and menu names may
differ on Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1.
Item Symptom Cause/Remedy
Printer driver You cannot print a file when using the
machine as a shared printer on a network.
On the server, click [start] and then select
[Operator panel] > [Security Center] >
[Windows Firewall].
Select the [Exceptions] tab and select the
[File and Printer Sharing] check box. Click
[OK].
OKI LPR Utility Unable to find a machine. If the [Don't allow exceptions] check box is
selected on the [General] tab of the Windows
firewall, you cannot search for a machine in a
segment that is connected to another router.
Only machines within the same segment as
the machine are the search target.
When you cannot find a machine, specify the IP
address of the machine in the [Add Printer] or
[Confirm Connections] screen.
Print Super Vision Unable to access the machine from a remote
computer.
Click [start] and then select [Operator
panel] > [Security Center] > [Windows
Firewall].
Select the [Exception] tab and click [Add
Program]. Select the following files and then
click [Open] > [OK] > [OK].
"(J2EE location)\jdk\bin\java.exe"
"(J2EE location)\jdk\bin\javaw.exe"
"(J2EE location)\jdk\jre\bin\java.exe"
"(J2EE location)\jdk\jre\bin\javaw.exe"
Pop-up windows are blocked. If you are using Internet Explorer, pop-up win-
dows may be blocked.
On Internet Explorer, select [Internet
Options] from the [Tools] menu.
Select the [Privacy] tab and click [Settings]
on the [Pop-up Blocker] area. On the
[Popup Blocker Settings] window, enter the
URL of Print Super Vision in [Address of Web
site to allow] and then click [Add]. Click
[Close] > [OK].
Web Driver
Ins
taller
Unable to find a machine. If the [Don't allow exceptions] check box is
selected on the [General] tab of Windows
Firewall, you cannot search for a machine in a
segment that is connected to another router.
Only machines within the same segment as
the machine are the search target.
Enter "*" in the fourth digit of the IP address
range to search.
Other Issues
-158-
Restrictions on Mac OS X 10.6
Restrictions on Mac OS X 10.5
Restrictions on Mac OS X 10.4
Web Driver
Installer
Unable to access the machine from a remote
computer.
Click [start] and then select [Operator
panel] > [Security Center] > [Windows
Firewall].
Select the [Exception] tab and click [Add
Port]. Add the port number of the web site on
which Driver Installer is installed.
Click [start] and then select [Operator
panel] > [Performance and Maintenance]
> [Administrative Tools].
Double-click [Component Services] and
change the access authority of the component
for Driver Installer.
For details on how to configure the settings,
refer to the readme file stored in [start] > [All
Programs] > [Okidata] > [Driver Installer]
> [Readme].
Item Symptom Cause/Remedy
TWAIN driver Unable to scan by image capture. Scan is available only when the computer is
connected by USB.
In the image capture, the user interface of
the TWAIN driver is not displayed. Use the
user interface of the image capture and
then scan data.
Item Symptom Cause/Remedy
TWAIN driver Unable to scan by image capture. In the image capture, if the computer is con-
nected to the network, display the user inter-
face of the TWAIN driver before using.
To display the user interface of the TWAIN
driver, after starting the image capture, select
[Browse Devices] from the [Devices] menu
of the image capture and then open the
device browser. Select a driver and click use
[Use TWAIN UI].
Item Symptom Cause/Remedy
TWAIN driver Unable to scan by image capture In the image capture, if the computer is con-
nected to the network, display the user inter-
face of the TWAIN driver before using.
To display the user interface of the TWAIN
driver, after starting the image capture, select
[Browse Devices] from the [Devices] menu
of the image capture. Select a driver in
[TWAIN devices] and then check the check-
box of [Use TWAIN software] shown in the
lower right screen.
Item Symptom Cause/Remedy
Other Issues
-159-
Troubleshooting
7
Copying Issues
Memo
If the following information does not solve your trouble, contact your dealer.
Unable to Copy
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Unable to copy. Is the machine turned on? Hold down the power switch for
about a second to turn on the
power.
P. 2 0
Is the machine initializing? Wait until initializing is done. -
Is your document properly loaded
on the machine?
Load the document properly on the
machine.
P. 3 8
Is there paper in the tray? Load paper in the tray.
Or, check that the paper cassette is
installed on the machine.
P. 3 2
Is the proper size of paper for your
document loaded in the tray?
Load the proper size of paper for
your document.
P. 3 2
Is the paper tray selectable when
[Paper Feed] is set to [Auto]?
Press the <SETTING> key and
select [Paper Setup] > [Select
Tray] > [Copy] > the paper tray
on which the paper you use is
loaded, and then select [ON] or
[ON(Prior)].
-
Is the loaded paper compatible
with duplex printing?
Duplex copying cannot be done
without the proper paper size,
document type, or document
weight.
Load the right paper for duplex
printing and configure the paper
size, document type, and
document weight correctly.
P. 3 2
Is the media type of the paper tray
set to [Plain] or [Recycled]?
When setting [Paper feed] to
[Auto], set the media type for the
paper tray to [Plain] or
[Recycled].
P. 3 6
Is there a paper jam? Check the error message and
remove any jammed paper.
P.135
Is there an empty toner cartridge? Replace it with a new toner
cartridge.
P.172
Is the image drum at the end of its
life?
Replace it with a new image drum. P.173
Are any covers on the machine
open?
Close all the covers. P. 1 5
Is an error occurring? Clear the error. P.141
Is another job in progress? Start copying after the other job is
complete.
-
Is a print job from a computer or
other device in progress?
Wait until printing is complete. -
Is a fax being transmitted in real
time?
Wait until the transmission is
complete.
-
Other Issues
-160-
The Copied Output is Different from the Original Document
Troubles after Starting to Copy
Unable to copy. Is the Continuous Scan mode on? Select [Scan completed] on the
display screen.
P. 8 2
Is the machine off line? Press the <PRINT> key on the
operator panel, and then select
[On-Line/Off-Line].
-
Do you have access to make
copies?
Enter your authorized PIN or user
name and password.
P.128
Unable to copy mixed
size documents.
Is [Mixed Size] set to [OFF]? Set [Mixed Size] to [ON]. Advanced
Is the size of your document
compatible for making mixed size
copies?
Use documents sizes supported for
mixed size copying.
Advanced
Is paper of all the sizes of your
original loaded?
Load paper of the required sizes on
each paper tray. The paper trays
need to be set to [ON] or [ON
(Prior)] from the <SETTING>
key > [Paper Setup] > [Select
Tray] > [Copy].
-
Unable to sort copies. Is [Sort] set to [OFF]? Set [Sort] to [ON]. Advanced
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
The copied output is
different from the
original document.
Is [DuplexCopy] enabled? Set [DuplexCopy] to [OFF]. P. 8 3
Is [Mixed Size] set to [ON]? Set [Mixed Size] to [OFF]. Advanced
The size of the copied
output is different from
the size of the original
document.
Is the proper size paper for the
document loaded on the paper
tray?
Load the proper size paper for the
document.
P. 3 2
Is the zoom ratio properly set? Set the proper zoom ratio. P. 8 1
Is [Repeat] set to [ON]? Set [Repeat] to [OFF]. Advanced
A part of the document
image is missing on the
copied output.
Is [Edge Erase] set to [ON]? Set [Edge Erase] to [OFF]. Advanced
Is [Margin] set to [ON]? Set [Margin] to [OFF]. Advanced
Is [N-in-1] set to [ON]? Set [N-in-1] to [OFF]. Advanced
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
The machine is slow to
start copying.
Is [Warming Up] or [Preparing]
displayed on the display screen?
The machine is preparing.
Wait until it starts copying.
-
A copy job is cancelled. Is any error occurring? A copy job is cancelled when
specific errors occur while copying.
Clear the error and start the copy
job again.
P.141
Is there paper in the MP tray? When copying using paper from
the MP tray, check if enough paper
is loaded in the MP tray before
starting to copy. And, press the
<SETTING> key and select
[Paper Setup] > [Select Tray] >
[Copy] > [MP tray], and then
check that [ON] or [ON (Prior)] is
selected.
-
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Other Issues
-161-
Troubleshooting
7
Faxing Issues
Memo
If the following information does not solve the trouble, contact your dealer.
Unable to Send a Fax
Unable to Receive a Fax
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Unable to send a fax. Did you perform the correct
procedure?
Check the appropriate procedure
and try again.
P. 8 6
Did you specify the correct
number?
If you use speed dial, print the
speed dial list and check the entry.
P. 8 7
Advanced
Did you specify the appropriate
dial line type?
Specify the appropriate dial line
type for your region.
P. 4 3
Is it due to the recipient machine? Contact and ask the recipient to
check machine status.
-
The machine does not
continuously send a
document.
Did you load the document
correctly on the ADF?
Keep the leading edges of the
pages in the document even.
P. 3 8
Did you load a document other
than A4, letter or legal 13/13.5/14
on the ADF?
Only A4, letter, and legal 13/13.5/
14 size documents can be sent
from the ADF.
-
The machine does not
send a fax even though
you dialed the number
and pressed .
Did you specify the appropriate
dial line type?
Specify the appropriate dial line
type for your region.
P. 4 3
Did you load the document
correctly?
Load the document correctly. P. 3 8
Did you dial the correct number? Dial the correct number. -
Is the recipient's line busy? Wait until the line is open and try
again.
-
Unable to transmit a fax
manually.
Did you put down the handset
before pressing ?
Press first and then put
down the handset.
Advanced
The machine does not
start scanning (during
memory transmission).
Did you load the document
correctly?
Load the document correctly. P. 3 8
Is there enough memory? Check the available memory. Advanced
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Unable to receive a fax. Did you specify the appropriate
reception mode?
Check the reception mode P. 9 2
Is there paper in the tray? Load the paper. P. 3 2
Is there a paper jam? Check the error message and
remove the jammed paper.
P.135
Is the telephone cable correctly
connected to the machine?
Connect the telephone cable
correctly.
P. 4 1
Is there enough memory? Check the available memory. Advanced
Unable to receive a fax
manually.
Did you put down the handset
before pressing ?
Press first and then put
down the handset.
P. 9 2
F code polling fails and
an error message is
printed out.
Did the sender store a document in
a bulletin box?
Contact and ask the sender to
store the polling document.
-
M
ONO
M
ONO
M
ONO
M
ONO
M
ONO
Other Issues
-162-
Unable to Send or Receive a Fax
The Machine does not Select the Appropriate Paper for the Received Fax
Scanning Issues
Memo
If the following information does not solve the trouble, contact your dealer.
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Unable to send or
receive a fax.
Is the telephone cable connected
properly?
Check the connection of the
telephone cable.
P. 4 1
Did you install an IP phone on the
machine in a broadband
environment?
Press the <SETTING> key and
select [Admin Setup] > [User
Install] > [Super G3] > [OFF].
-
Did you change the telephone
network?
Specify the appropriate dial line
type for your region.
-
Is the [Country Code] setting is
correct?
Please set the correct country
code.
P. 4 0
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
The machine does not
select the appropriate
size paper for the
received fax.
Did you specify other than [Plain]
or [Recycled] in [Media Type]
for the paper tray used for fax
reception?
Specify [Plain] or [Recycled] in
[Media Type] for the paper tray
used for fax reception.
Advanced
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Cannot start scan job. Is the machine turned on?
Hold down the power switch for
about a second to turn on the power.
P. 2 0
Is the cable connected to the
machine?
Check the cable connections and
connect them properly.
P. 4 6
Is there any damage to the cable? Change the cable. P. 4 6
Is the network setting proper?
Correct the network setting. P. 6 5
Is an error occurring? Follow the instructions displayed on
the display screen of the machine.
P. 1 4 1
Transmission and
reception of e-mail
not possible.
Did you connect the Ethernet cable
after turning on the machine?
Hold down the power switch for
about a second to turn on the power.
Connect the Ethernet cable and then
hold down the power switch for
about a second to turn on the power.
P. 4 7
The network connection setting is
wrong.
This product cannot connect to a
wired LAN and wireless LAN at the
same time. To connect to a wired
network, set the network connection
to wired. To connect to a wireless
network, set the network connection
to wireless.
-
Other Issues
-163-
Troubleshooting
7
Image Quality Issues
Memo
If the following information does not solve your trouble, contact your dealer.
Transmission and
reception of e-mail
not possible.
Not connected to a wireless access
point.
Check that the wireless access
point power is switched on.
Check the wireless access point
settings, and then try the manual
settings or automatic settings.
Restart the wireless LAN function.
Press the <SETTING> key and
select [Admin Setup] >
[Network Menu] > [Network
Setup] > [Wireless Setting],
and then select [Reconnect
Wireless].
-
Is the e-mail address of the machine
set?
Set the e-mail address of the
machine.
P. 6 6
Did you enter the wrong e-mail
address?
Enter the correct e-mail address. P. 6 6
Is the SMTP server address setting
correct?
Check the SMTP server setting. P.6 6
Is the POP3 server address setting
correct?
Check the POP3 server setting. P. 6 6
Is the DNS server address setting
correct?
Check the DNS server address
setting.
P. 6 6
Is another job running? Wait until the other job finishes. -
Is an error occurring? Follow the instructions displayed on
the display screen of the machine.
P. 1 4 1
Files cannot be saved in
a network file folder.
Is the FTP/CIFS setting right? Check the profile settings. P. 7 7
Is an error occurring? Follow the instructions displayed on
the display screen of the machine.
P. 1 4 1
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Vertical white lines
appear.
The LED heads are dirty. Wipe the LED heads with a soft
tissue paper.
P.178
The toner is low. Replace the toner cartridge. P.172
Foreign material may be present
on the image drum.
Replace the image drum. P.173
The image drum is not installed
properly.
Install the image drum properly. P.173
The ADF document glass is dirty. Clean the ADF document glass. P.176
Printed images are
fading vertically.
The LED heads are dirty. Wipe the LED heads with soft
tissue paper.
P.178
The toner is low. Replace the toner cartridge. P.172
The paper is unsuitable. Use supported paper. -
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Other Issues
-164-
Printed images are light. The toner cartridge is not installed
properly.
Install the toner cartridge properly. P.172
The toner is low. Replace the toner cartridge. P.172
The paper is moist. Use paper stored under proper
temperature and humidity
conditions.
P. 3 1
The paper is unsuitable. Use supported paper. -
The paper is unsuitable.
The settings of media type and
width are incorrect.
Press the <SETTING> key and
select [Paper Setup] > the paper
tray you are using, and then select
the proper values for [Media
Type] and [Media Weight]. Or,
select the thicker values for
[Media Weight].
P. 3 6
The paper is recycled. Press the <SETTING> key and
select [Paper Setup] > the paper
tray you are using, and then select
the thicker values for [Media
Weight].
P. 3 6
Yellow and green are used in the
original document.
If the original data was
transmitted, ask the sender to
change the color of the original
document to black and white.
-
Printed images are
partially faded. White
spots and lines appear.
The paper is too moist or dry. Use paper stored under proper
temperature and humidity
conditions.
P. 3 1
Vertical lines appear. The image drum is damaged. Replace the image drum. P.173
The toner is low. Replace the toner cartridge. P.172
The document glass and paper
feed roller of the ADF are dirty.
Clean the document glass and
paper feed roller.
P.176
Horizontal lines and
spots appear
periodically.
If the interval of lines or spots is
about 94 mm (3.7 inches), the
image drum (the green tube) is
damaged or dirty.
Lightly wipe the image drum with
soft tissue paper.
Replace the image drum if it is
damaged.
P.173
If the interval of lines or spots is
about 40 mm (1.6 inches), foreign
materials may be present on the
image drum.
Open and close the top cover, and
print again.
-
The image drum has been exposed
to light.
Place the image drum back into
the machine and leave it for a few
hours. If it does not solve the
problem, replace the image drum.
P.173
The paper feed path is dirty. Print a few test copies. -
White area of paper is
lightly stained.
The paper contains static
electricity.
Use paper stored under proper
temperature and humidity
conditions.
P. 3 1
The paper is too thick. Use thinner paper. -
The toner is low. Replace the toner cartridge. P.172
Periphery of letters is
smudged.
The LED heads are dirty. Wipe the LED heads with soft
tissue paper.
P.178
The paper is unsuitable. Use recommended paper. -
The paper is moist. Replace it with new paper. P. 3 2
The entire paper area is
lightly stained
when
printing on envelopes or
coated paper.
The toner may be sticking to the
whole area of the envelope or
coated paper.
This is not a malfunction of the
machine.
Coated paper is not recommended.
-
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Other Issues
-165-
Troubleshooting
7
Toner comes off when it
is rubbed.
The settings of media type and
width are incorrect.
Press the <SETTING> key and
select [Paper Setup] > the paper
tray you are using, and then select
the proper values for [Media
Type] and [Media Weight]. Or,
select the thicker values for
[Media Weight].
P. 3 6
The paper is recycled. Press the <SETTING> key and
select [Paper Setup] > the paper
tray you are using, and then select
the thicker values for [Media
Weight].
P. 3 6
Glossiness is not
uniform.
The settings of media type and
width are incorrect.
Press the <SETTING> key and
select [Paper Setup] > the paper
tray you are using, and then select
the proper values for [Media
Type] and [Media Weight]. Or,
select the thicker values for
[Media Weight].
P. 3 6
Black or white dots
appear.
The paper is unsuitable. Use supported paper. -
When the interval of the dots is
about 94 mm (3.7 inches), the
image drum (the green tube) is
damaged or dirty.
Lightly wipe the image drum with a
soft tissue paper.
Replace the image drum when it is
damaged.
P.173
The document glass or the
document holding pad is dirty.
Clean the document glass and the
document holding pad.
P.176
Dirt is printed. The paper is moist. Replace it with new paper. P. 3 2
The paper is unsuitable. Use supported paper. -
The document glass or the
document holding pad is dirty.
Clean the document glass and the
document holding pad.
P.176
The entire page is
printed black.
The machine may be
malfunctioning.
Contact your dealer. -
Nothing is printed. Two or more sheets of paper are
fed simultaneously.
Fan the paper well and load it
again.
P. 3 2
The machine may be
malfunctioning.
Contact your dealer. -
The back side of the document is
being scanned.
Load the document properly. P. 3 8
White patches appear. The paper is moist. Replace it with new paper. P. 3 2
The paper is unsuitable. Use supported paper. -
The document glass is dirty. Clean the document glass. P.176
The entire page is dirty. The document glass is dirty. Clean the document glass. P.176
When the document is double
sided, the image on the back side
is printed through.
When the document is thin, the
back side image may be
printed
through. Lighten the density.
-
The peripheral area of
the page is dirty.
The paper holding roller or the
document holding pad is dirty.
Clean the paper holding roller and
the document holding pad.
P.176
The paper size is bigger than the
size of the document (when the
zoom ratio is set to 100%).
Use paper of the same size as the
document.
-
The orientation of the document
and paper are different.
Set the proper orientation of the
document.
-
The zoom ratio is set improperly. Set the zoom ratio properly
according to the paper size.
-
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Other Issues
-166-
Feeding Issues
Memo
If the following information does not solve the trouble, contact your dealer.
The printed image is
skewed.
The document is loaded
improperly.
Load the document properly. P. 3 8
An unsuitable document is loaded
in the ADF.
Load a suitable document in the
ADF.
P. 3 8
Foreign materials may be present
on the ADF document glass.
Clean the ADF document glass. P.176
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
The document is not
ejected from the
machine.
The document jammed. Remove the jammed document
and re-load it.
P.135
The document often
jams.
The document is not appropriate
for the machine.
Use an appropriate document. P. 3 7
The document guides are not
correctly adjusted.
Adjust the document guides to the
document.
P. 3 8
There is a piece of paper inside the
ADF.
Open the document cover and
remove any paper.
P.135
The rollers in the ADF are not
clean.
Clean the rollers in the ADF. P.176
The paper often jams.
Multiple sheets are fed
at once.
The paper is fed at an
angle.
The machine is inclined.
Place the machine on a flat surface.
-
The paper is too light or too heavy. Use the appropriate paper for the
machine.
P. 2 9
The paper is moist or has a static
charge.
Use paper stored under proper
temperature and humidity
conditions.
P. 3 1
The paper is wrinkled, folded or
curled.
Use appropriate paper for the machine.
Fix the re-flexed paper.
P. 2 9
Something is already printed on
the back side of the paper.
You cannot use paper that has been
printed on for tray 1 and tray 2.
Load it in the MP tray or Manual
Feeder for printing.
P. 3 4
The edges of the paper are not
kept even.
Fan the paper and even up the
edges.
P. 3 2
There is only one sheet of paper in
the tray.
Load several sheets of paper. P. 3 2
You have added new paper onto
the paper already loaded in the
tray.
Remove the already loaded paper,
stack it onto the new paper, even
up the edges and load the paper
with the old paper on top.
P. 3 2
The paper is loaded at an angle. For tray 1 and tray 2, adjust the
paper width guide and stopper to
the paper.
For the MP tray or Manual Feeder,
adjust the paper width guide to the
paper.
P. 3 2
Envelopes are not correctly loaded. Load envelopes correctly. P. 3 4
Paper, envelopes or labels whose
weight is between 123 and 163 g/m
2
(33 and 43 lb) is loaded on the tray 1
and tray 2.
Load the paper, envelopes or labels
whose weight is between
1
23 and
1
63 g/m
2
(33 and 43 lb) in the MP
tray (MB451/MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb) or
Manual Feeder (MB441/MB461/
MB461+LP/ES4161 MFP).
P. 3 4
P. 3 7
Other Issues
-167-
Troubleshooting
7
Machine Issues
Memo
If the following information does not solve the trouble, contact your dealer.
Paper does not feed into
the machine.
The setting of [Paper Feeding
Source] on the printer driver is
not correctly specified.
Check the paper tray and select
the correct tray in [Paper
Feeding Source] on the printer
driver.
-
You have specified manual feeding
on the printer driver.
Load the paper in the MP tray.
Then, on the operator panel, select
[Restart].
Or, on the printer driver, clear the
[
Use MP tray as manual feed
]
check box on [
Paper feed options
].
P. 3 4
Advanced
The machine does not
start processing even
though you have
removed the jammed
paper.
- Open and close the top cover. -
The paper gets folded or
wrinkled.
The paper is moist or has a static
charge.
Use paper stored under proper
temperature and humidity conditions.
P. 3 1
The paper is light.
Press the <
SETTING
> key and then
select [
Paper Setup
] > [
(tray
name)
] > [
Media Weight
].
Then, specify a lighter weight.
P. 3 6
The paper twists around
the rollers in the fuser
unit.
The settings of media weight and
type are incorrect.
Press the <SETTING> key and
then select [Paper Setup] >
[(tray name)] > [Media Type]/
[Media Weight]. Then, specify
the appropriate values.
Or, specify the heavier weight in
[Media Weight].
P. 3 6
The paper is light. Use heavier paper. -
There is an image or text on the
leading edge of the paper.
Have a margin on the leading edge
of the paper.
For duplex printing, leave a margin
on the leading and bottom edges.
-
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Turned on the machine,
but it stays "Off-Line".
The AC cable is unplugged. Hold down the power switch for
about a second to turn on the
power and then plug in the AC
cable firmly.
-
The power is out. Check if the power is being
supplied to the electric outlet.
-
The machine does not
operate.
The AC cable is not firmly plugged in.
Plug in the AC code firmly. -
The machine is turned off. Hold down the power switch for
about a second to turn on the
power.
P. 2 0
The power turned off
automatically because of
the auto power off
function, and does not
respond.
The power turned off automatically
because it has passed the auto
power off time.
Please turn on the power. -
The printer does not
respond.
The printer is in error status. Press the power switch for more
than 5 seconds and turn off the
power. And then turn on the power
again.
-
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Other Issues
-168-
The machine does not
start printing.
An error is displayed on the panel. Check the error code and follow
the on-screen instructions.
P. 1 4 1
The Ethernet or USB cable is
unplugged.
Plug in the Ethernet or USB cable
firmly.
P. 4 7
P. 6 0
Something is wrong with the
Ethernet or USB cable.
Use another Ethernet or USB cable. -
The machine does not support your
Ethernet or USB cable.
Use a USB 2.0 compatible cable.
Use an Ethernet 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX compatible cable.
-
Something may be wrong with the
printing function.
Press the <SETTING> key and
select [Reports] > [Configura-
tion] and print out the configura-
tion list to check the printing
performance.
P. 7 8
The interface is disabled. Press the <SETTING> key and
select [Admin Setup] > [Net-
work Menu] > [Network Setup]
and enable the interface you are
using.
-
The printer driver of the machine is
not selected.
Set the printer driver of the
machine as the default printer.
-
The specified port of the printer
driver is wrong.
Specify the port the Ethernet or
USB cable is connected to.
-
The display screen is
blank.
The machine is in the sleep mode. Check if the <POWER SAVE> key
lights up and press the <POWER
SAVE> key to activate the
machine.
P. 2 0
Print data is not
transmitted to the
machine.
The Ethernet or USB cable is
broken.
Connect a new cable. -
The time-out period set on the
computer has passed.
Set a longer time-out period. -
There is an abnormal
sound.
The machine is inclined. Place the machine on a flat
surface.
-
There is a piece of paper or
unknown object inside the
machine.
Check the inside of the machine
and remove any objects.
-
The top cover is open. Close the top cover. -
There is a buzzing
sound.
The machine is printing on heavy
or thin paper when the
temperature inside is high.
This is not a malfunction. You can
proceed with the operation.
-
It takes a while to start
printing.
The machine is warming up from
the power save or sleep mode.
Press
the
<SETTING> key and
select [Admin Setup] > [User
Install] > [Power Save Enable]/
[Sleep] and disable both modes.
P. 2 0
The machine may be cleaning the
image drum.
Wait for a while. -
The machine is adjusting the
temperature of the fuser unit.
Wait for a while. -
The machine is processing data
from another interface.
Wait until the process finishes. -
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Other Issues
-169-
Troubleshooting
7
A print job has stopped
in the middle of the
printing process.
As a result of processing print jobs
continuously, the fuser unit has
become hot. The fuser unit is
cooling off.
Wait for a while.
When the fuser unit gets cooler,
printing restarts automatically.
-
As a result of processing print jobs
continuously for a long time, the
temperature in the machine inside
has become too high. The machine
is cooling off.
Wait for a while.
When the machine gets cooler,
printing restarts automatically.
-
The specified settings
such as the time setting
have been erased.
The machine was turned off for a
long time or every day.
The life of the battery may have
ended. Contact your dealer.
-
Memory is insufficient. You have launched Multiple
applications.
Close the applications you are not
using.
-
It takes a long time to
finish printing.
The processing speed of the
computer may be slowing down
the print job.
Use a computer with faster
processing speed.
-
You have selected [High Quality
(Multiple tones)] on the [Print
Job Options] tab of the printer
driver.
Select [Fine / Detail
(600x1200)] or [Normal
(600x600)] on the [Job
Options] tab of the printer driver.
-
The print data is complicated. Make the data simpler. -
The printer driver is not
correctly displayed on
Mac OS X.
The printer driver may not be
operating correctly.
Uninstall the printer driver and
install it again.
Advanced
The machine turns off
automatically.
When your machine is not used for
a certain period of time (factory
default is 4 hours), the power turns
off automatically. This function is
called Auto Power Off.
Press the <SETTING> key and
select [Admin Setup] > [User
Install] > [Power Save] > [Auto
Power Off] and disable the
function.
P. 1 9
Symptom Point to check Remedy Reference
Other Issues
-170-
When the Power Goes Out
Machine Behavior
When the power goes out, the machine behaves in the following way:
We do not warrant operation when an uninterruptible power system (UPS) or inverter is used.
Stored Fax Data
Backing Up Data in Memory
Even if the power goes out or you turn off the machine, the data for fax transmissions and received
faxes is retained in the memory.
Erased Report
The machine automatically prints out an erased report if the fax data in the memory is lost. The report
shows what data is lost by listing the following information:
F Code Box Document
Documents Received at Alternate Recipients
The deletion notification will inform you of the next item after the deleted data.
Document type
F-code box number
F-code box name
Destination name
F-code Confidential communication/F-code bulletin board communication
Time communication started
Received number of pages
Memo
The communication type is printed for manual reception, F-code polling, F-code secure reception or F-code bulletin board
reception.
Machine's Status Behavior
During a call You can continue talking.
During transmitting a fax The communication stops.
When the electricity supply is restored,
The machine automatically starts transmitting the fax whose transmission stopped
and the subsequent data if it was a memory transmission.
The machine does not transmit the data if it was a real time transmission. Set the
document and specify the destination again to start transmission.
Receiving a fax The transmission stops in the middle of the operation.
When the electricity supply is restored, the machine automatically prints out the data
successfully received and stored in memory.
Copying or printing a list The printing process stops in the middle of the operation.
When the power is restored, start the job again.
Idle You cannot start another copy, fax, scan, or print job.
You also cannot receive another fax.
-171-
Maintenance
8
8. Maintenance
This chapter explains how to replace consumables, clean the machine, and move or transport the
machine.
Replacing Consumable Items
This section explains how to replace consumable items.
Use only genuine Oki Data consumable items to ensure optimum quality.
Service for problems caused by the use of consumable items other than genuine OKI consumables is not covered under the
warranty or in the maintenance contract.
WARNING
Do not throw the toner or
toner cartridge into the fire.
Doing so may cause toner
splashes leading to burns.
Do not keep toner cartridges
near fire. They may catch
fire, which can spread and
cause burns.
Do not vacuum spilled toner
powder. If vacuuming, it may
cause ignition due to the
sparks from electric contacts.
Toner spillage on the floor
should be wiped up using a
wet cloth.
CAUTION
There are high temperature
parts in the device. Do not
touch the periphery of the
label "Caution High
Temperature", which may
cause burns.
Keep the toner cartridge out
of reach of young children. If
young children swallow toner
powder, seek immediate
medical attention.
If toner powder is inhaled,
gargle with large amounts of
water and move the person to
the open area for fresh air.
Seek medical attention if
necessary.
If your skin is exposed to
toner, wash thoroughly with
soap.
If toner gets into your eyes,
flush with large amounts of
water immediately.
If you swallow toner powder,
take large amounts of water
to weaken the toner. Seek
medical attention if
necessary.
When handling a paper jam,
or replacing the toner
cartridge, make sure not to
get your clothes and hands
dirty. When toner powder
stains on your clothes, wash
with cold water. If you wash
with hot water, the toner may
be soaked into the cloth; it
may be difficult to clean.
Do not disassemble the toner
cartridge. Toner powder may
fly upward, and you may
inhale the toner powder or
may get your clothes and
hands dirty.
Keep used toner cartridges in
a bag so that the toner
powder cannot fly upward.
Replacing Consumable Items
-172-
Replacing Toner Cartridges
A toner selling is different by an area.
Procedure for Replacement
1
Open the top cover and remove the used
toner cartridge.
Memo
When disposing of used toner cartridges by necessity,
poly-bag them, and be sure to follow instructions and
regulations of your local government.
Rotate the blue lever of the toner cartridge in
the direction of the arrow of on the toner
cartridge until it stops.
Remove the toner cartridge.
2 Install a new toner cartridge.
Unpack the new toner cartridge.
Hold the toner cartridge and gently shake it
several times.
Place the toner cartridge horizontally and
partially remove the tape from it.
Hold the toner cartridge with the tape face
down and the blue lever on the right side.
Insert the toner cartridge, while matching its
left side with the protrusion on the left side of
the image drum.
Firmly press the grooves on the right side of
the toner cartridge against the protrusion of
the cartridge guide on the right side of the
image drum.
While holding down the toner cartridge top
with your hand to prevent it from rising,
rotate the blue release lever on the right side
in the direction of the arrow of on the
toner cartridge until it stops.
Note
When the toner cartridge is not fully fixed, a decline in
print quality may occur.
3 Lightly wipe the whole LED head with a
soft cloth or soft tissue paper.
Model Type
MB461/
MB461+LP/
MB471/
MB471w/
ES4161
MFP
Starter toner cartridge
Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge
(Medium)
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191
MFP
Starter toner cartridge
Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge
(Medium)
Toner cartridge (Large)
MB441/
MB451/
MB451w
Starter toner cartridge
Toner cartridge
Toner cartridge (Small)
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Toner cartridge (Large)
WARNING
Be sure not to throw used toner
cartridges into fire; toner in the
cartridges may scatter and ignite,
causing burn injuries.
Toner cartridge
lever
Toner cartridge
Tape
Protrusion of image drum
lever
Replacing Consumable Items
-173-
Maintenance
8
Do not use solvents, such as methyl alcohol or thinners.
They damage the LED head.
4 Close the top cover.
5 Close the scanner unit.
Memo
If you dispose of a toner cartridge by necessity, put it in a
polyethylene bag or something and then dispose of it in
accordance with your municipality's ordinances or guidelines.
Replacing the Image Drum (MB461, MB461+LP,
MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+, MB491+LP, ES4161
MFP, ES4191 MFP, MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
Life Duration of Image Drum
When the [Image Drum Near Life] message
appears on the display screen, prepare a
replacement image drum.
If you continue printing, the message [Please
Replace the Image Drum] will be displayed
and printing will stop.
A guideline for replacing the image drum is every
30,000 pages or so for A4 sized paper (with
single-sided printing). However, this number of
pages is for printing with general conditions (3
pages at a time). Printing one page at a time
reduces the drum life by about half.
The actual number of printed pages may be
halved again relative to the above guideline,
depending on the printing conditions.
The actual number of pages you can print with the image
drum depends on how you use it. The above guideline may be
reduced by more than half, depending on the conditions of
printing.
The print quality may deteriorate after the toner cartridge
has been unpacked for a year. Replace it with a new one.
Procedure for Replacement
Note
The image drum (the green tube) is very delicate. Handle
it carefully.
Do not expose the image drum to direct sunlight or very
bright interior light (approximately more than 1500lux).
Even under the normal interior light, do not leave it for
more than 5 minutes.
To ensure optimum performance, please use original Oki
Data consumables.
Service for problems caused by the use of consumable
items other than genuine OKI consumables is not covered
under the warranty or in the maintenance contract. (This
does not apply to all faults occurring with non-original Oki
Data products; however, please bear this in mind when
using them.)
1 Open the top cover and remove the used
image drum.
Remove the image drum upward slowly.
If the image drum is removed, the toner
cartridge is also removed.
2 Install a new image drum.
Take the new image drum out of the wrapping
bag. Remove the silica gel.
Note
Always use a new image drum. An image drum that has
been attached or used on another printer cannot be used.
LED head
WARNING
Be sure not to throw used image
drum and toner cartridges into
fire; toner in the cartridges may
scatter and ignite, causing burn
injuries.
Silica gel
Replacing Consumable Items
-174-
Align both guide posts of the image drum with
their guide grooves on the printer, and gently
set the image drum into the printer.
Remove the toner cover (orange) from the
image drum set in the printer by pushing the
projection in the direction of the arrow.
Memo
Dispose of the toner cover as non-burnable waste.
Some toner may remain on the reverse of the toner cover.
Take care as it may stain other parts when removed.
The image drum (the green cylinder) is very delicate.
Handle it with extreme care.
Do not expose the image drum to direct sunlight or bright
interior light (approximately 1,500 lux or more). When
leaving it under normal interior light for 5 minutes or
more, cover it with black paper.
Do not leave the image drum for more than 1 hour, even if
it is covered with black paper.
3 Install a new toner cartridge.
For details, see "Procedure for Replacement"
(P. 172).
4 Close the top cover.
Replacing the Image Drum
(MB441, MB451, MB451w only)
Life Duration of Image Drum
When the [Image Drum Near Life] message
appears on the display screen, prepare a
replacement image drum.
If you continue printing, the message [Please
Replace the Image Drum] will be displayed
and printing will stop.
A guideline for replacing the image drum is every
25,000 pages or so for A4 sized paper (with
single-sided printing). However, this number of
pages is for printing with general conditions (3
pages at a time). Printing one page at a time
reduces the drum life by about half.
The actual number of printed pages may be
halved again relative to the above guideline,
depending on the printing conditions.
Note
The actual number of pages you can print with the image
drum depends on how you use it. The above guideline may be
reduced by more than half, depending on the conditions of
printing.
Note
The print quality may deteriorate after the toner cartridge
has been unpacked for a year. Replace it with a new one.
Procedure for Replacement
Note
The image drum (the green tube) is very delicate. Handle
it carefully.
Do not expose the image drum to direct sunlight or very
bright interior light (approximately more than 1500lux).
Even under the normal interior light, do not leave it for
more than 5 minutes.
To ensure optimum performance, please use original Oki
Data consumables.
Service for problems caused by the use of consumable
items other than genuine OKI consumables is not covered
under the warranty or in the maintenance contract. (This
does not apply to all faults occurring with non-original Oki
Data products; however, please bear this in mind when
using them.)
Guide Post
Guide Post
Guide Grooves
Protrusion
Toner cover
Replacing Consumable Items
-175-
Maintenance
8
1 Open the top cover and remove the used
image drum.
Remove the image drum upward slowly.
If the image drum is removed, the toner
cartridge is also removed.
2 Install a new image drum.
Take the new image drum out of the wrapping
bag. Remove the silica gel.
Always use a new image drum. An image drum that has
been attached or used on another printer cannot be used.
Align both guide posts of the image drum with
their guide grooves on the printer, and gently
set the image drum into the printer.
Turn the lever in the direction shown.
Note
The image drum (the green cylinder) is very delicate.
Handle it with extreme care.
Do not expose the image drum to direct sunlight or bright
interior light (approximately 1,500 lux or more). When
leaving it under normal interior light for 5 minutes or
more, cover it with black paper.
Do not leave the image drum for more than 1 hour, even if
it is covered with black paper.
3 Close the top cover.
WARNING
Be sure not to throw used image
drum and toner cartridges into
fire; toner in the cartridges may
scatter and ignite, causing burn
injuries.
Silica gel
Guide Post
Guide Post
Guide Grooves
Cleaning Your Machine
-176-
Cleaning Your Machine
This section explains how to clean each part of your machine.
Cleaning the Surface of the
Machine
Do not use benzine, thinners, or alcohol as a cleaning
agent. They may damage the plastic parts of the machine.
Do not lubricate your machine with oil.
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
Reference
"Turning Off Your Machine" (P. 20)
2 Wipe the surface of the machine with a
soft cloth lightly moistened with water or
neutral detergent.
3 Dry the surface of the machine with a
dry soft cloth.
Cleaning the Document Glass
It is recommended to clean the document glass
once a month to maintain image quality of the
printouts.
Do not use benzine, thinners, or alcohol as a cleaning
agent. They may damage the plastic parts of the machine.
1 Open the document glass cover.
2 Wipe the document holding pad (1),
document glass (2) and ADF document
glass (3) surface with a soft cloth lightly
moistened with water.
3 Close the document glass cover.
Memo
If the document glasses surface and the document holding
pad get too dirty, wipe them with a soft cloth lightly
moistened with neutral detergent, and then wipe it again
with a soft cloth lightly moistened with water.
Cleaning Document Feeding
Rollers in the ADF
If the document feeding rollers in the ADF are
contaminated with ink, toner particles or paper
dust, documents and outputs get dirty and a
paper jam may occur. To prevent this, it is
recommended to clean the rollers once a month.
Note
Do not use benzine, thinners, or alcohol as a cleaning
agent. They may damage the plastic parts of your
machine.
1 Open the ADF cover.
2 Wipe the document feeding rollers (1),
surface of the guide (2), rubber pad (3)
and rubber sheet (4) with a soft cloth
lightly moistened with water.
Wipe the whole surface of the roller while turning
it with your hand.
3 Close the ADF cover.
Memo
If the rollers get too dirty, wipe them with a soft cloth
lightly moistened with neutral detergent, and then wipe it
again with a soft cloth lightly moistened with water.
2
3
1
1
3
4
2
Cleaning Your Machine
-177-
Maintenance
8
Cleaning Paper Feed Rollers
Clean the paper feed rollers if paper jams occur
frequently.
For Tray 1 and Tray 2
Memo
The following images use tray 1 as an example, but the
same procedure applies to tray 2.
1 Pull out the Tray.
2 Wipe the paper feed rollers (1) inside the
machine with a soft cloth lightly
moistened with water.
3 Wipe the paper feed roller (2) on the
Tray.
4 Push the Tray back into the machine.
For MP Tray (MB451, MB451w,
MB471, MB471w, MB491, MB491+,
MB491+LP, ES4191 MFP,
MPS4200mb, MPS4700mb only)
1 Open the MP tray.
2
While pressing the tab (1) of the paper feed
roller cover to the right, open the cover.
3 Wipe the paper feed roller (2) with a soft
cloth lightly moistened with water.
4 Close the cover of the paper feed roller.
5 Close the MP tray.
1
2
2
3
4
1
2
Cleaning Your Machine
-178-
Cleaning LED Heads
Clean the LED heads if vertical white lines
appear, images are fading vertically, or the
periphery of letters is smudged in the printouts.
Dirt on the LED heads may also cause paper
jams.
Do not use methyl alcohol or thinners as a cleaning agent.
They may damage the LED heads.
Do not expose the image drum to direct sunlight or very
bright interior light (approximately more than 1500 lux).
Even under the normal interior light, do not leave it for
more than 5 minutes.
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
Reference
"Turning Off Your Machine" (P. 20)
2 Open the scanner unit.
3 Press the top cover open button (1) and
open the top cover.
4 Lightly wipe the lenses (2) of the LED
heads with soft tissue paper.
5 Close the top cover.
6 Close the scanner unit.
CAUTION
Burn risk.
The fuser unit is extremely hot. Do not touch it.
1
2
Moving Your Machine
-179-
Maintenance
8
Moving Your Machine
This section explains how to move or transport your machine.
Moving Your Machine
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
Reference
"Turning Off Your Machine" (P. 20)
2 Unplug all the cables.
AC cable and ground wire
Ethernet or USB cable
Telephone cable(s)
3 Remove any paper from the paper trays.
4 lift your machine and move it to a new
location.
Transporting Your Machine
The image drum (the green tube) is very delicate. Handle
it carefully.
Do not expose the image drum to direct sunlight or very
bright interior light (approximately more than 1500 lux).
Even under the normal interior light, do not leave it for
more than 5 minutes.
1 Hold down the power switch for about a
second to turn on the power.
Reference
"Turning Off Your Machine" (P. 20)
2 Unplug all the cables.
AC cable and ground wire.
Ethernet or USB cable.
Telephone cable(s)
3 Remove any paper from the paper trays.
4 Open the scanner unit.
5 Press the top cover open button (1) and
open the top cover.
6 Close the top cover.
7 Close the scanner unit.
8 Remove the optional second tray unit
from the main unit if it is installed.
Remove the lock parts and lift your machine, and
then remove the second tray unit.
CAUTION
Possible to get
burned.
The fuser unit is extremely hot. Do not touch it.
1
Moving Your Machine
-180-
9 Protect your machine with packing
materials.
10 Lift your machine and put it in a box.
Use the packing materials attached to your machine
when purchased.
Remove the vinyl tape to secure the image drum
and toner cartridges after transporting or when
reinstalling.
-181-
Appendix
9
9. Appendix
This chapter explains the specifications of your machine and information on consumables and optional
components.
Specifications (MB461/MB461+LP/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161
MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
General Specifications
MFP Model Model Number
MB461/MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
N22205A, N22205B
MB471 N22206A, N22206B
MB471w N22207A, N22207B
MB491/MB491+/
MB491+LP/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
N22208A, N22208B
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
CPU Printer controller
PowerPC405 , 330 MHz
Scanner controller
ARM9 max 266 MHz
Memory Resident Printer controller
256 MB
Scanner controller
128 MB
Flash
ROM
Printer
Controller
SPI ROM : 16MB x 2
Scanner
Controller
NAND : 64 MB
SPI : 2 MB
Storage Device - SD memory card
Resident
4 GB (Except
MB491+.)
Weight 20 kg (including consumables)
Dimensions MB461/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/ES4161 MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb:
427 (W) x 425 (D) x 455 (H)
MB461+LP/MB491+LP/MPS4700mb:
486 (W) x 425 (D) x 455 (H)
Power supply N22205A, N22206A, N22207A, N22208A: 120V AC ±10% , 50/60Hz ±2%
N22205B, N22206B, N22207B, N22208B: 220V AC ±10%, 50/60Hz ±2%
Specifications (MB461/MB461+LP/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161 MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
-182-
Copier Specifications
Power consumption Typical operation
MB461/ ES4161 MFP :
540W
MB461+LP : 640W
Idle
80 W
Peak
950 W
Sleep mode
Less than 3 W
Power save mode
Less than 14 W
Off mode
Less than 0.5 W
Typical operation
580 W
Idle
80 W
Peak
950 W
Sleep mode
Less than 3 W
Power save mode
Less than 14 W
Off mode
Less than 0.5 W
Typical operation
580 W
Idle
80 W
Peak
950 W
Sleep mode
Less than 3 W
Power save mode
18 W
Off mode
Less than 0.5 W
Typical operation
MB491/ ES4191
MFP/ MPS4200mb :
610W
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
MPS4700mb : 660W
Idle
80 W
Peak
950 W
Sleep mode
Less than 3 W
Power save mode
Less than 14 W
Off mode
Less than 0.5 W
Operating condition Operating
Temperature : 10 to 32°C, humidity : 20 to 80% RH
Idle
Temperature : 0 to 43°C, humidity : 10 to 90% RH
Interface USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed), Ethernet 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed),
Ethernet 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX,
IEEE802.11 b/g/n
Wireless LAN
USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed),
Ethernet 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
Display Graphics panel 84.1(W) x 33.6(H) mm, 320 x 128 dots
Supported OS Windows 8, Windows Server 2012, Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008
R2, Windows Server 2008, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Mac OS X 10.4.0-10.8
Please refer to "Product Requirements" (P.46)
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Document
size
ADF
A6 , B5 , A5 , A4 , letter , legal 13/13.5/14, executive
Document
glass
A6 , B5 , A5 , A4 , letter , legal 13/13.5/14 (only MB461+LP/MB491+LP/
MPS4700mb), executive
First copy
Time
Mono Less than 11
seconds (ADF, High
Speed)
Less than 11
seconds (ADF, High
Speed)
Less than 11
seconds (ADF, High
Speed)
Less than 10
seconds (ADF, High
Speed)
Copies Up to 99
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Specifications (MB461/MB461+LP/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161 MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
-183-
Appendix
9
Fax Specifications
PC Fax Specifications
Internet Fax Specifications
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Compatibility - ITU-T G3/Super G3
Compression method - MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Modem speed - Up to 33.6 Kbps
Lines - PSTN, PBX Line
Line interface - RJ11 x 2 (Line/TEL)
Document
size
ADF - A4, letter, legal 13/13.5/14
Document
glass
- A4, letter, legal 13/13.5/14 (only MB491+LP/MPS4700mb)
Transmission speed - Approx. 3 seconds/page (ITU-T, MMR, Normal)
Stored document
memory size
-4 MB
Storage document
capacity
- Up to 200 pages (ITU-T no.1, MMR, Normal)
Resolution - Normal
8 dots x 3.85 line/mm
Fine
8 dots x 7.7 line/mm
Photo
8 dots x 7.7 line/mm
Extra-Fine
8 dots x 15.4 line/mm
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Interface - USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed),
Ethernet 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed),
Ethernet 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX,
IEEE802.11 b/g/n
Wireless LAN
USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed),
Ethernet 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
Supported OS -
Windows 8, Windows Server 2012, Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows
Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Communication
protocol
- SMTP, POP3, MIME
File format TIFF - TIFF
Specifications (MB461/MB461+LP/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161 MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
-184-
Scanner Specifications
Scan To E-mail Specifications
Scan To Network PC Specifications
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Scanner type Document Glass with ADF function
Image sensor Color CIS
Light source LED
Document
thickness
ADF
60 to 105 g/m
2
(16 to 28 lb)
Document
glass
20 mm
ADF document
capacity
50 sheets (80 g/m
2
)
Scanning
area
ADF 105 x 148 - 215.9 x 355.6 mm (4.13 x 5.8 - 8.5 x 14 inches)
Document
glass
105 x 148 - 215.9 x 296.9 mm (4.13 x 5.8 - 8.5 x 11.69 inches)
105 x 148 - 215.9 x 355.6 mm (4.13 x 5.8 - 8.5 x 14 inches) (only MB461+LP/
MB491+LP/MPS4700mb)
Scanning
speed
Color Approx. 6 seconds/page (A4, 300 x 300 dpi, ADF simplex)
Mono Approx. 2 seconds/page (A4, 300 x 300 dpi, ADF simplex)
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Communication
protocol
SMTP, POP3, MIME
File format PDF (supported Encryption), M-TIFF (RAW/G3/G4 compressed), JPEG (JFIF) (color/
grayscale only), XPS
Mail server
authentication
SMTP-AUTH, POP3
Supported mail
server application
Lotus Domino Mail Server 5.0, Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server, Microsoft Exchange 2003
Server, Microsoft Exchange 2007 Server, Red Hat 7.0 Sendmail
Supported LDAP
server
Windows Server 2008 Active Directory, Windows Server 2003 ActiveDirectory, Windows
2000 Server Active Directory, Lotus Notes/Domino 7.0
Supported mail
application
Microsoft Office Outlook 2000, Microsoft Outlook Express 5.0/6.0, Windows Mail
(Windows Vista), Windows Live Mail, Mail (MAC built-in application), Lotus Notes/Domino
R5
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Communication
protocol
FTP, HTTP, CIFS
Specifications (MB461/MB461+LP/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161 MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
-185-
Appendix
9
Scan To USB Memory Specifications
Scan To Local PC Specifications
Printing Specifications
File format PDF (supported Encryption), M-TIFF (RAW/G3/G4 compressed), JPEG (JFIF) (color/
grayscale only), XPS
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Connectivity interface USB2.0 Host IF
Storage device USB memory (Up to 32 GB)
Not all USB memory products are guaranteed to work.
Supported file system FAT12, FAT (FAT16), FAT32
File format PDF (supported Encryption), M-TIFF (RAW/G3/G4 compressed), JPEG (JFIF) (color/
grayscale only), XPS
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Communication
protocol
Windows TWAIN, WIA
Mac OS X TWAIN, ICA
File format PDF, TIFF, JPEG, BMP, PCX, GIF, TGA, PNG, WMF, EMF
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Printing method Dry electrophotographic recording method with LED (Light-emitting diode)
Emulation T PCL6 (PCLXL), PCL5e PCL6 (PCLXL), PCL5e, PostScript 3
Resident fonts PCL: 91 European
fonts
PCL: 91 European fonts
PS: 136 European fonts
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi,
600 x 1200 dpi,
600 x 2400dpi
600 x 600 dpi, 1200 x 1200 dpi 600 x 600 dpi,
1200 x 1200 dpi
Color black
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Specifications (MB461/MB461+LP/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161 MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
-186-
Print speed (A4) 600 x 600 dpi,
600 x 1200 dpi
Simplex:
Approx.33 ppm for
MB461/ES4161
MFP
Approx.45.5 ppm
for MB461+LP
Duplex:
Approx.17 ppm
600 x 2400 dpi
Simplex:
Approx.17 ppm
Duplex:
Approx.9 ppm
1200 x 1200 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
Simplex: Approx.33 ppm
Duplex: Approx.17 ppm
1200 x 1200 dpi,
600 x 600 dpi
Simplex:
Approx.40 ppm for
MB491/ES4191
MFP/MPS4200mb
Approx.45.5 ppm
for MB491+/
MB491+LP/
MPS4700mb
Duplex:
Approx.20 ppm
First print
out time
Standby 5 seconds or less
Power
save
30 seconds or less
Paper size Tray1 Legal 13/13.5/14, letter, executive, Statement, A4, A5, B5, A6, 16K (197 x 273 mm,
195 x 270 mm, 184 x 260 mm), custom size
Tray2
(Optional)
Legal 13/13.5/14,
letter, executive, A4,
A5, B5, 16K (197 x
273 mm, 195 x 270
mm, 184 x 260
mm), custom size
Legal 13/13.5/14, letter, executive, A4, A5,
B5, 16K (197 x 273 mm, 195 x 270 mm,
184 x 260 mm), custom size
Legal 13/13.5/14,
letter, executive, A4,
A5, B5, 16K (197 x
273 mm, 195 x 270
mm, 184 x 260
mm), custom size
MP Tray - Legal 13/13.5/14, letter, executive, Statement, A4, A5, B5, A6,
C5, C6, DL, Com-9, Com-10, Monarch, 16K (197 x 273 mm,
195 x 270mm, 184 x 260 mm), custom size
Manual
Feeder
Legal 13/13.5/14,
letter, executive,
Statement, A4, A5,
B5, A6, C5, C6, DL,
Com-9, Com-10,
Monarch, 16K
(197 x 273 mm, 195
x 270mm, 184 x 260
mm), custom size
-
Duplex
Printing
Legal 13/13.5/14, letter, executive, A4, B5, 16 K (197 x 273 mm, 195 x 270 mm,
184 x 260 mm)
Custom
size
Tray 1
100 x 148-216 x
355.6 mm (3.94 x
5.83-8.5 x 14 inches)
Tray 2 (optional)
148 x 210-216 x
355.6 mm (5.83 x
8.27-8.5 x 14
inches)
Manual Feeder
86 x 140-216 x
1320.8 mm (3.4 x
5.5-8.5 x 52 inches)
Tray 1
100 x 148-216 x 355.6 mm (3.94 x 5.83-
8.5 x 14 inches)
Tray 2 (optional)
148 x 210-216 x 355.6 mm (5.8 x 8.27-8.5
x 14 inches)
MP tray
86 x 140-216 x 1320.8 mm (3.4 x 5.5-8.5
x 52 inches)
Tray 1
100 x 148-216 x
355.6 mm (3.94 x
5.83-8.5 x 14
inches)
Tray 2 (optional)
148 x 210-216 x
355.6 mm (5.8 x
8.27-8.5 x 14
inches)
MP tray
86 x 140-216 x
1320.8 mm (3.4 x
5.5-8.5 x 52 inches)
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Specifications (MB461/MB461+LP/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161 MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
-187-
Appendix
9
Media type
Standard paper (60 g/m
2
- 163 g/m
2
), envelopes, label.
Feeding method Automatic feeding
from the tray 1 and
tray 2 (optional),
Manual feeding from
Manual Feeder
Automatic feeding from the tray 1, MP tray
and tray 2 (optional), Automatic feeding
from MP tray
Automatic feeding
from the tray 1, MP
tray and tray 2
(optional), Automatic
feeding from MP tray
Paper loading
capacity
Tray 1
250 sheets of
Standard paper /80
g/m
2
, total thickness
25mm or lower.
Manual Feeder
1 sheet.
Tray 2 (optional)
530 sheets of
Standard paper /80
g/m
2
, total thickness
53 mm or lower.
Tray 1
250 sheets of Standard paper /80 g/m
2
,
total thickness 25mm or lower.
MP tray
100 sheets of Standard paper /80 g/m
2
and
total thickness 10mm or lower, 10
envelopes/ weight of 85 g/m
2
.
Tray 2 (optional)
530 sheets of Standard paper /80 g/m
2
,
total thickness 53 mm or lower.
Tray 1
250 sheets of
Standard paper /80
g/m
2
, total thickness
25mm or lower.
MP tray
100 sheets of
Standard paper /80
g/m
2
and total
thickness 10mm or
lower, 10 envelopes/
weight of 85 g/m
2
.
Tray 2 (optional)
530 sheets of
Standard paper /80
g/m
2
, total thickness
53 mm or lower.
Output method Face down
Paper output capacity Face down
150 sheets (less than 80 g/m
2
)
Print guaranteed area 6.35 mm or more from the paper edge (not applicable to special media such as
envelopes)
Print precision Print beginning:± 2 mm, paper skew: ± 1 mm/100 mm, image expansion: ± 1 mm/100
mm (80 g/m
2
)
Warm-up time From power on
Less than 60 seconds
From power save mode
Less than 25 seconds
Usage Environment
Conditions
When in operation
10~32°C / Relative Humidity of 20~80% (maximum wet bulb temperature of 25°C,
maximum dry bulb temperature of 2°C)
When not in operation
0~43°C / Relative Humidity of 10~90% (maximum wet bulb temperature of 26.8°C,
maximum dry bulb temperature of 2°C)
Conditions for the
guarantee of print
quality
Temperature 10°C, humidity 30 to 78% RH/ temperature 32°C, humidity 30 to 54% RH/
humidity 30% RH, temperature 10 to 32°C/ humidity 80% RH, temperature 18 to 27°C
Consumables,
Maintenance Unit
Toner cartridges, image drum
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Specifications (MB461/MB461+LP/MB471/MB471w/MB491/MB491+/MB491+LP/ES4161 MFP/ES4191 MFP/MPS4200mb/MPS4700mb)
-188-
Print From USB Memory Specifications
Network Specifications
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Interface USB 2.0 (High Speed) Host IF
Storage device USB memory (Up to 32 GB)
Not all USB memory products are guaranteed to work.
Supported file system FAT12, FAT (FAT16), FAT32
File format TIFF (TIFF 6.0
Baseline), PRN (PCL)
PDF (v1.7, Does not support encrypted PDF), JPEG, TIFF (TIFF 6.0
Baseline), PRN (PS/PCL)
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Interface Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX,
IEEE802.11 b/g/n
Wireless LAN
Ethernet 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
Protocol TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6, NetBEUI, NetBIOS
over TCP, EtherTalk, NetWare, LPR,
Port9100, IPP, FTP, HTTP, TELNET, SMTP,
POP3, SNMPv1/v3, DHCP, BOOTP, DNS,
DDNS, UPnP, WINS, SLP, Bonjour
(Rendezvous), SNTP, LLTD, Web Services
Discovery (WSD), SSL/TLS, IPSec, CIFS,
SMB (Version 1.0), LDAPv3, Kerberos
TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6,
NetBEUI, NetBIOS
over TCP, EtherTalk,
NetWare, LPR,
Port9100, IPP, FTP,
HTTP, TELNET, SMTP,
POP3, SNMPv1/v3,
DHCP, BOOTP, DNS,
DDNS, UPnP, WINS,
SLP, Bonjour
(Rendezvous), SNTP,
LLTD, Web Services
Discovery (WSD),
SSL/TLS, IPSec, CIFS,
SMB (Version 1.0),
LDAPv3, Kerberos,
IEEE802.11 b/g/n,
Infrastructure Mode,
WEP, WPA(TKIP/AES),
WPS-PCB/WPS-PIN,
Open system
authentication,
IEEE802.1x
authentication
TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6,
NetBEUI, NetBIOS
over TCP, EtherTalk,
NetWare, LPR,
Port9100, IPP, FTP,
HTTP, TELNET, SMTP,
POP3, SNMPv1/v3,
DHCP, BOOTP, DNS,
DDNS, UPnP, WINS,
SLP, Bonjour
(Rendezvous), SNTP,
LLTD, Web Services
Discovery (WSD),
SSL/TLS, IPSec,
CIFS, SMB (Version
1.0), LDAPv3,
Kerberos
Supported browsers Microsoft IE 6.0 or later, Safari 2.0 or later, Firefox 3.0 or later
Specifications (MB441/MB451/MB451w)
-189-
Appendix
9
Wireless LAN Specifications
Specifications (MB441/MB451/MB451w)
General Specifications
MB461/
MB461+LP/
ES4161 MFP
MB471 MB471w
MB491/
MB491+/
MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb
Wireless LAN adapter - OkiLAN520w -
Wireless LAN
standard
- IEEE802.11b/g/n
conformity (2.4GHz)
-
Transfer rate - 11n technology:
Max150Mbps
IEEE802.11g:
Max54Mbps
IEEE802.11b:
Max11Mbps
-
Antenna system - Built-in Antenna
1T1R
-
LAN protocol - TCP/IP (IPv6/IPv4) -
Security - WEP(128/
64bit),WPA,WPA2,IE
EE802.1x wireless
securities.
-
MFP Model Model Number
MB441 N22205B
MB451 N22206B
MB451w N22207B
MB441 MB451 MB451w
CPU Printer controller
PowerPC405 , 330 MHz
Scanner controller
ARM9 max 266 MHz
Memory Resident Printer controller
256 MB
Scanner controller
128 MB
Flash
ROM
Printer
Controller
SPI ROM : 16MB x 2
Scanner
Controller
NAND : 64 MB
SPI : 2 MB
Storage Device -
Weight 20 kg (including consumables)
Dimensions 427 (W) x 425 (D) x 455 (H)
Power supply N22205A, N22206A, N22207A: 120V AC ±10% , 50/60Hz ±2%
N22205B, N22206B, N22207B: 220V AC ±10%, 50/60Hz ±2%
Specifications (MB441/MB451/MB451w)
-190-
Copier Specifications
Fax Specifications
Power consumption Typical operation
540 W
Idle
80 W
Peak
950 W
Sleep mode
Less than 3 W
Power save mode
Less than 14 W
Off mode
Less than 0.5 W
Typical operation
580 W
Idle
80 W
Peak
950 W
Sleep mode
Less than 3 W
Power save mode
Less than 14 W
Off mode
Less than 0.5 W
Typical o peration
580 W
Idle
80 W
Peak
950 W
Sleep mode
Less than 3 W
Power save mode
18 W
Off mode
Less than 0.5 W
Operating condition Operating
Temperature : 10 to 32°C, humidity : 20 to 80% RH
Idle
Temperature : 0 to 43°C, humidity : 10 to 90% RH
Interface USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed), Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed), Ether-
net 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX,
IEEE802.11 b/g/n Wireless
LAN
Display Graphics panel 84.1(W) x 33.6(H) mm, 320 x 128 dots
Supported OS Windows 8, Windows Server 2012, Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008
R2, Windows Server 2008, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Mac OS X 10.4.0-10.8
Please refer to "Product Requirements" (P.46)
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Document
size
ADF
A6 , B5 , A5 , A4 , letter , legal 13/13.5/14, executive
Document
glass
A6 , B5 , A5 , A4 , letter , executive
First copy
Time
Mono 10 seconds or less (ADF,
High Speed)
10 seconds or less (ADF,
High Speed)
10 seconds or less (ADF,
High Speed)
Copies Up to 99
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Compatibility - ITU-T G3/Super G3
Compression method - MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Modem speed - Up to 33.6 Kbps
Lines - PSTN, PBX Line
Line interface - RJ11 x 2 (Line/TEL)
Document
size
ADF - A4, letter, legal 13/13.5/14
Document
glass
- A4, letter
Transmission speed - Approx. 3 seconds/page (ITU-T, MMR, Normal)
Stored document
memory size
-4 MB
Storage document
capacity
- Up to 200 pages (ITU-T no.1, MMR, Normal)
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Specifications (MB441/MB451/MB451w)
-191-
Appendix
9
PC Fax Specifications
Internet Fax Specifications
Scanner Specifications
Scan To E-mail Specifications
Resolution - Normal
8 dots x 3.85 line/mm
Fine
8 dots x 7.7 line/mm
Photo
8 dots x 7.7 line/mm
Extra-Fine
8 dots x 15.4 line/mm
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Interface - USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed), Ether-
net 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed), Ethernet
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX,
IEEE802.11 b/g/n Wireless LAN
Supported OS - Windows 8, Windows Server 2012, Windows 7, Windows
Vista, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Communication
protocol
- SMTP, POP3, MIME
File format TIFF - TIFF
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Scanner type Document Glass with ADF function
Image sensor Color CIS
Light source LED
Document
thickness
ADF
60 to 105 g/m
2
(16 to 28 lb)
Document
glass
20 mm
ADF document
capacity
50 sheets (80 g/m
2
)
Scanning
area
ADF 105 x 148 - 215.9 x 355.6 mm (4.13 x 5.8 - 8.5 x 14 inches)
Document
glass
105 x 148 - 215.9 x 296.9 mm (4.13 x 5.8 - 8.5 x 11.69 inches)
Scanning
speed
Color Approx. 6 seconds/page (A4, 300 x 300 dpi, ADF simplex)
Mono Approx. 2 seconds/page (A4, 300 x 300 dpi, ADF simplex)
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Communication
protocol
SMTP, POP3, MIME
File format PDF (supported Encryption), M-TIFF (RAW/G3/G4 compressed), JPEG (JFIF) (color/
grayscale only), XPS
Mail server
authentication
SMTP-AUTH, POP3
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Specifications (MB441/MB451/MB451w)
-192-
Scan To Network PC Specifications
Scan To USB Memory Specifications
Scan To Local PC Specifications
Printing Specifications
Supported mail
server application
Lotus Domino Mail Server 5.0, Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server, Microsoft Exchange 2003
Server, Microsoft Exchange 2007 Server, Red Hat 7.0 Sendmail
Supported LDAP
server
Windows Server 2008 Active Directory, Windows Server 2003 ActiveDirectory, Windows
2000 Server Active Directory, Lotus Notes/Domino 7.0
Supported mail
application
Microsoft Office Outlook 2000, Microsoft Outlook Express 5.0/6.0, Windows Mail
(Windows Vista), Windows Live Mail, Mail (MAC built-in application), Lotus Notes/Domino
R5
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Communication
protocol
FTP, HTTP, CIFS
File format PDF (supported Encryption), M-TIFF (RAW/G3/G4 compressed), JPEG (JFIF) (color/
grayscale only), XPS
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Connectivity interface USB2.0 Host IF
Storage device USB memory (Up to 32 GB)
Not all USB memory products are guaranteed to work.
Supported file system FAT12, FAT (FAT16), FAT32
File format PDF (supported Encryption), M-TIFF (RAW/G3/G4 compressed), JPEG (JFIF) (color/
grayscale only), XPS
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Communication
protocol
Windows TWAIN, WIA
Mac OS X TWAIN, ICA
File format PDF, TIFF, JPEG, BMP, PCX, GIF, TGA, PNG, WMF, EMF
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Printing method Dry electrophotographic recording method with LED (Light-emitting diode)
Emulation T PCL6 (PCLXL), PCL5e PCL6 (PCLXL), PCL5e, PostScript 3
Resident fonts PCL: 91 European fonts PCL: 91 European fonts
PS: 136 European fonts
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi,
600 x 1200 dpi,
600 x 2400dpi
600 x 600 dpi
Color black
Print speed (A4) 600 x 600 dpi
Simplex: Approx.29 ppm
Duplex: Approx.17 ppm
600 x 600 dpi
Simplex: Approx.29 ppm
Duplex: Approx.17 ppm
First print
out time
Standby 5 seconds or less
Power
save
30 seconds or less
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Specifications (MB441/MB451/MB451w)
-193-
Appendix
9
Paper size Tray1 Legal 13/13.5/14, letter, executive, Statement, A4, A5, B5, A6, 16K (197 x 273 mm,
195 x 270 mm, 184 x 260 mm), custom size
MP Tray - Legal 13/13.5/14, letter, executive, Statement, A4, A5,
B5, A6, C5, C6, DL, Com-9, Com-10, Monarch, 16K (197 x
273 mm,
195 x 270mm, 184 x 260 mm), custom size
Manual
Feeder
Legal 13/13.5/14, letter,
executive, Statement, A4,
A5, B5, A6, C5, C6, DL,
Com-9, Com-10, Monarch,
16K
(197 x 273 mm, 195 x
270mm, 184 x 260 mm),
custom size
-
Duplex
Printing
Legal 13/13.5/14, letter, executive, A4, B5, 16 K (197 x 273 mm, 195 x 270 mm,
184 x 260 mm)
Custom
size
Tray 1
100 x 148-216 x 355.6 mm
(3.94 x 5.83-8.5 x 14 inches)
Manual Feeder
86 x 140-216 x 1320.8 mm
(3.4 x 5.5-8.5 x 52 inches)
Tray 1
100 x 148-216 x 355.6 mm (3.94 x 5.83-8.5 x 14 inches)
MP tray
86 x 140-216 x 1320.8 mm (3.4 x 5.5-8.5 x 52 inches)
Media type
Standard paper (60 g/m
2
- 163 g/m
2
), envelopes, label.
Feeding method Automatic feeding from the
tray 1, Manual feeding from
Manual Feeder
Automatic feeding from the tray 1, MP tray
Paper loading
capacity
Tray 1
250 sheets of Standard
paper /80 g/m
2
, total
thickness 25mm or lower.
Manual Feeder
1 sheet.
Tray 1
250 sheets of Standard paper /80 g/m
2
, total thickness
25mm or lower.
MP tray
100 sheets of Standard paper /80 g/m
2
and total thickness
10mm or lower, 10 envelopes/ weight of 85 g/m
2
.
Output method Face down
Paper output capacity Face down
150 sheets (less than 80 g/m
2
)
Print guaranteed area 6.35 mm or more from the paper edge (not applicable to special media such as
envelopes)
Print precision Print beginning:± 2 mm, paper skew: ± 1 mm/100 mm, image expansion: ± 1 mm/100
mm (80 g/m
2
)
Warm-up time From power on
Less than 60 seconds
From power save mode
Less than 25 seconds
Usage Environment
Conditions
When in operation
10~32°C / Relative Humidity of 20~80% (maximum wet bulb temperature of 25°C,
maximum dry bulb temperature of 2°C)
When not in operation
0~43°C / Relative Humidity of 10~90% (maximum wet bulb temperature of 26.8°C,
maximum dry bulb temperature of 2°C)
Conditions for the
guarantee of print
quality
Temperature 10°C, humidity 30 to 78% RH/ temperature 32°C, humidity 30 to 54% RH/
humidity 30% RH, temperature 10 to 32°C/ humidity 80% RH, temperature 18 to 27°C
Consumables,
Maintenance Unit
Toner cartridges, image drum
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Specifications (MB441/MB451/MB451w)
-194-
Print From USB Memory Specifications
Network Specifications
Wireless LAN Specifications
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Interface USB 2.0 (High Speed) Host IF
Storage device USB memory (Up to 32 GB)
Not all USB memory products are guaranteed to work.
Supported file system FAT12, FAT (FAT16), FAT32
File format TIFF (TIFF 6.0 Baseline),
PRN (PCL)
PDF (v1.7, Does not support encrypted PDF), JPEG, TIFF
(TIFF 6.0 Baseline), PRN (PS/PCL)
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Interface Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX, IEEE802.11 b/
g/n Wireless LAN
Protocol TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6, NetBEUI, NetBIOS over TCP,
EtherTalk, NetWare, LPR, Port9100, IPP, FTP, HTTP,
TELNET, SMTP, POP3, SNMPv1/v3, DHCP, BOOTP, DNS,
DDNS, UPnP, WINS, SLP, Bonjour (Rendezvous), SNTP,
LLTD, Web Services Discovery (WSD), SSL/TLS, IPSec,
CIFS, SMB (Version 1.0), LDAPv3, Kerberos
TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6, NetBEUI,
NetBIOS over TCP, EtherTalk,
NetWare, LPR, Port9100, IPP,
FTP, HTTP, TELNET, SMTP,
POP3, SNMPv1/v3, DHCP,
BOOTP, DNS, DDNS, UPnP,
WINS, SLP, Bonjour
(Rendezvous), SNTP, LLTD,
Web Services Discovery
(WSD), SSL/TLS, IPSec, CIFS,
SMB (Version 1.0), LDAPv3,
Kerberos, IEEE802.11 b/g/n,
Infrastructure Mode, WEP,
WPA(TKIP/AES), WPS-PCB/
WPS-PIN, Open system
authentication, IEEE802.1x
authentication
Supported browsers Microsoft IE 6.0 or later, Safari 2.0 or later, Firefox 3.0 or later
MB441 MB451 MB451w
Wireless LAN adapter - OkiLAN520w
Wireless LAN
standard
- IEEE802.11b/g/n conformity
(2.4GHz)
Transfer rate - 11n technology:
Max150Mbps
IEEE802.11g: Max54Mbps
IEEE802.11b: Max11Mbps
Antenna system - Built-in Antenna 1T1R
LAN protocol - TCP/IP (IPv6/IPv4)
Security - WEP(128/
64bit),WPA,WPA2,IEEE802.
1x wireless securities.
Specifications (MB441/MB451/MB451w)
-195-
Appendix
9
Regulatory wireless LAN statements
-FCC Statement
-Notice to users in Canada
-Europe-CE Declaration of conformity.
FCC statement
Notice to users in Canada
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause hamful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including ingerference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d’Ubdustrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) I’appareil ne
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) I’utilisateur de I’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
This Class [B] digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe [B] est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Specifications (MB441/MB451/MB451w)
-196-
Europe - CE Declaration of Conformity
This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC.
Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains
N.America 2.412-2.462 GHz Ch01-CH11
Europe ETSI 2.412-2.472 GHz Ch01 - Ch13
France
Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band. The worst case maximum authorized power indoors is:
•10 mW for the entire 2.4 GHz band (2400 MHz-2483.5 MHz).
•100 mW for frequencies between 2446.5 MHz and 2483.5 MHz (NOTE—Channels 10 through 13 inclusive operate in the band
2446.6 MHz to 2483.5 MHz).
There are few possibilities for outdoor use: On private property or on the private property of public persons, use is subject to a
preliminary authorization procedure by the Ministry of Defence, with maximum authorized power of 100 mW in the 2446.5-2483.5
MHz band. Use outdoors on public property is not permitted.
In the departments listed below, for the entire 2.4 GHz and:
Maximum authorized power indoors is 100 mW.
Maximum authorized power outdoors is 10 mW.
Departments in which the use of the 2400-2483.5 MHz band is permitted with an EIRP of less than lOOmW indoors and less than
10mW outdoors:
01 Ain 02 Aisne 03 Allier 05 Hautes Alpes 08 Ardennes 09 Ariège
11 Aude 12 Aveyron 16 Charente 24 Dordogne 25 Doubs 26 Drôme
32 Gers 36 Indre 37 Indre et Loire 41 Loir et Cher 42 Loire 45 Loiret
50 Manche 55 Meuse 58 Nièvre 59 Nord 60 Oise 61 Orne
63 Puy de Dôme 64 Pyrénées Atlantique 66 Pyrénées Orientales 67 Bas Rhin 68 Haut Rhin 70 Haute Saône
71 Saône et Loire 75 Paris 82 Tarn et Garonne 84 Vaucluse 88 Vosges 89 Yonne
90 Territoire de Belfort 94 Val de Marne
This requirement is likely to change over time, allowing you to use your wireless LAN card in more areas within France. Please
check with ART for the latest Information (www.art-telecom.fr)
Italia
Approved for indoor use only. The outdoor use is subject to an official permission.
The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries:
Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,
Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey and United Kingdom.
Specifications (MB441/MB451/MB451w)
-197-
Appendix
9
Use Wireless Communications
This page explains the radio wave used by OkiLAN520w.
OkiLAN520w operates at 2.4GHz.
No radio license is required to use OkiLAN520w. Take note of the following points.
Do not use OkiLAN520w near the following equipments or places.
The following equipment may use the same band. If you use OkiLAN520w near this equipment, the radio waves from OkiLAN520w
and the following devices may interfere with each other.
•Microwave, scientific instruments, pacemaker or other medical equipment.
•Licensed radio station in a factory.
•Small power radio station (a non-licensed radio station).
Do not use OkiLAN520w near a cellular phone, TV or Radio.
A cellular phone, TV, and radio use a different radio band than our product. Generally if they are used near OkiLAN520w, it will not
cause a problem. However, when they approximate OkiLAN520w, sound or image noise can happen.
If there is reinforced concrete/metal between wireless devices, they may not connect.
OkiLAN520w can connect through wood or glass, but can have trouble communicating through reinforced concrete/metal.
Wireless Equipment for 2.4GHz band
This band of equipment is used by a microwave, industry, science, medical equipment and licensed in room or low power (non
licensed) radio stations.
•Before you use this equipment, verify that it will not interfere with other broadcasting.
•If interference happens, stop using the equipment or change the band.
Basic steps in Windows
-198-
Basic steps in Windows
These are the steps for displaying the driver setting window from [Printer] / [Printer and FAX] folder
for Windows OS used for examples in this manual other than Windows 7.
Memo
The steps for Windows Server 2008 R2 are the same as Windows 7.
For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012, follow the procedures below to display the device and printer. Select [Desktop],
[Charm bar](displayed by moving the mouse cursor to the top-right corner of the screen or by clicking the right of the screen),
[Setup], [Control Panel], and [Displaying Devices and Printers]. The steps from the device and printer are the same as
Windows 7.
If you have multiple drivers installed, the icons for each driver are displayed in the [Printer] / [Printer and FAX] folder. Please
follow the below steps using the drivers you want to set/check. Please follow the below steps using the drivers you want to set/
check.
Displays the Property screen
For Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008
1 Click [Start], and select [Control Panel] > [Printer].
2 Right-click on the OKI MB491 icon, and select [Properties].
For Windows XP/Windows Server 2003
1 Click [Start], and select [Printers and Faxes] .
2 Right-click on the OKI MB491 icon, and select [Properties].
Displays the printer setting screen
For Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008
1 Click [Start], and select [Control Panel] > [Printer].
2 Right-click on the OKI MB491 icon, and select [Printing Preferences].
For Windows XP/Windows Server 2003
1
Click [Start], and select [Printers and Faxes].
2 Right-click on the OKI MB491 icon, and select [Printing Preferences].
-199-
Index
Index
Symbols
-(Hyphen) ..................... 87
*(Asterisk) .................... 88
#(Hash Symbol) ............ 88
A
Access Control ............. 128
ActKey .........107, 112, 113
Address Book
............101, 109, 119
ADF ............................. 38
Administrator Password
............................ 66
ADSL ............................ 42
Advanced Search
................... 102, 110
AES .............................. 51
Ans/Fax Ready Mode ...... 92
Attached File Of An E-mail
............................ 66
Auto Reset .................... 85
B
BACK Key ..................... 26
Background Removal ...... 84
Binding ....................... 126
C
Cleaning Document Feeding
Rollers in the ADF
.......................... 176
Cleaning LED Head ....... 178
Cleaning Paper Feed Rollers
.......................... 177
Cleaning the Document Glass
.......................... 176
CLEAR Key ....26, 28, 79, 82
Color Paper ................... 30
Configuration Report ...... 78
Continuous Scan
...82, 86, 98, 100, 109
COPY Key ................25, 79
Copy Settings ................80
Copying ........................79
Country Code .................40
CS Tuner .......................42
Custom Size ..................36
D
DATA IN MEMORY Indicator
...................... 26, 92
Default Screen ...............26
Density ................... 83, 90
Dial Functions ................87
Dial Type ......................43
Digital Television ............42
Direction .......................81
Document Glass .............38
Document Jam ............. 140
Document Type ..............83
DRD ....................... 45, 93
Duplex Copies ................83
Duplex Printing
............... 32, 36, 126
Duplex Scanning ............38
E
E-mail History .............. 109
Entering Text .................27
Envelope .......................30
Error Code ............135, 141
Error Messages ............ 141
F
Face Down Skater ..........37
Face Up Skater ..............37
Fax Ready Mode .............45
FAX/HOOK Key
............... 25, 86, 100
Fit .............................. 126
Flash ............................87
Function Keys ................26
G
Group Dial .................... 96
Group List
.......88, 101, 109, 120
H
HELP Key (for MB441/MB461/
MB461+LP/ES4161 MFP)
..................... 25, 141
I
ICA .............................104
Image Capture .............112
Image Drum ........ 173, 174
Index Card ................... 30
Install
Fax Driver ................ 53
Printer Driver (Mac OS X)
............... 55, 62
Printer Driver (Windows)
............... 53, 61
Scanner Driver ........104
Installation Requirements
............................ 14
Internet Faxing ............100
IP Address .................... 53
IP Telephone ................. 42
J
JOB MACRO Key ............ 26
L
Label ........................... 30
LDAP ................... 102, 110
Loading Documents ....... 37
Logging Into the Machine
...........................129
Logging Out the Machine
...........................129
M
Mac OS X ..................... 46
Manual Feeder .......... 33, 35
Index
-200-
MP Tray
.... 33, 34, 80, 94, 126
N
Network Configuration
.......................... 104
Network Scan Destinations
.......................... 121
O
One-Touch Key
.... 26, 88, 97, 99, 109
P
Paper Feed .............80, 126
Paper Jams ................. 135
Paper Size ... 29, 32, 36, 122
Paper Tray ...............32, 36
Paper Weight (Document)
............................ 38
Paper Weight (Print Paper)
.......................29, 32
PaperPort .................... 113
Party-Printing Paper ....... 30
Password .................... 132
Pause ........................... 88
PBX .............................. 43
PIN ............................ 129
PIN (Wirelss LAN) .......... 48
Power Goes Out ........... 170
POWER SAVE Key .....20, 26
Power Save Mode ........... 20
Power Supply Conditions
............................ 19
PreFix ........................... 87
PRINT Key ......25, 124, 125
Printer Driver .............. 122
Printing From USB Memory
.......................... 125
Product Requirements .... 46
Profile .....................76, 77
Public Line .................... 41
Q
QWERTY Keyboard ... 26, 28
R
Receiving Calls ...............92
Receiving Faxs ...............92
Reception History ..... 91, 95
Reception Mode .............45
REDIAL/HELP Key (for MB451/
MB451w/MB471/
MB471w/MB491/
MB491+/MB491+LP/
ES4191 MFP/
MPS4200mb/
MPS4700mb)
.................... 25, 141
Register all E-mail addresses.
.......................... 120
RESET/LOGOUT Key
........25, 85, 129, 132
Resolution (Fax) .............90
S
SCAN Key ...... 25, 109, 111,
112, 115, 116
Scan Resolution .............84
Scan Size ...........38, 80, 90
Scan to E-mail ............. 109
Scan to Fax Server .........98
Scan to Local PC .......... 112
Scan to Network PC ...... 111
Scan to Remote PC ....... 113
Scan to USB Memory .... 111
Scannable Size ..............38
Scanning ..................... 109
Second Tray Unit (Tray2)
.................... 22, 179
Secure Scan Mode ........ 116
Sender Name ........... 44, 90
Server Set Up ................65
SETTING Key .................25
Setting Paper Size ..........36
Simple Scan Mode ........ 114
Simple Search ......102, 110
Sleep Mode ................... 21
Specifying a Destination
.............. 87, 101, 109
Speed Dial ...............88, 95
SSID ............................ 50
Standard Paper ............. 29
START (COLOR) Key
......25, 109, 111, 112,
113, 116, 118
START (MONO) Key ...... 25,
79, 86, 109, 111, 112,
113, 116, 118
STATUS Key ... 25, 135, 141,
152
STOP Key ......... 25, 79, 91,
103, 118, 127
Symbols ....................... 27
T
Tel Ready Mode ............. 92
Tel/Fax Ready Mode ....... 92
Ten-Key ........... 27, 37, 79,
81, 87, 129
TKIP ............................ 51
Tone ............................ 88
Toner Cartridge ............172
Transmission History
... 88, 95, 99, 101, 119
TWAIN ......... 104, 112, 113
U
USB Memory ................125
User Authentication .......128
User Name ..................132
W
WIA ............................104
Windows ...................... 46
Wireless LAN ................. 47
WPA2-PSK .................... 51
WPA-PSK ...................... 51
WPS ............................ 47
Z
Zoom ........................... 81
Oki Systems (UK) Ltd
Blays House
Wick Road
Egham
Surrey
TW20 0HJ
Tel:+44 (0) 1784 274300
Fax:+44 (0) 1784 274301
http://www.oki.co.uk
Oki Systems Ireland Limited
The Square Industrial Complex
Tallaght
Dublin 24
Tel:+353 (0) 1 4049590
Fax:+353 (0)1 4049591
http://www.oki.ie
Oki Systems Ireland Limited -
Northern Ireland
19 Ferndale Avenue
Glengormley
BT36 5AL
Northern Ireland
Tel:+44 (0) 7767 271447
Fax:+44 (0) 1 404 9520
http://www.oki.ie
Technical Support for all Ireland:
Tel:+353 1 4049570
Fax:+353 1 4049555
E-mail: tech.support@oki.ie
OKI Systems (Czech and Slovak),
s.r.o.
IBC – Pobřežní 3
186 00 Praha 8
Czech Republic
Tel: +420 224 890158
Fax:+420 22 232 6621
Website: www.oki.cz, www.oki.sk
Oki Systems (Deutschland) GmbH
Hansaallee 187
40549 Düsseldorf
Tel: 01805/6544357**
01805/OKIHELP**
Fax: +49 (0) 211 59 33 45
Website:
www.okiprintingsolutions.de
info@oki.de
**0,14€/Minute aus dem dt. Festnetz
der T-Com (Stand 11.2008)
CPI S.A1 Rafailidou str.
177 78 Tavros
Athens
Greece
Tel: +30 210 48 05 800
Fax:+30 210 48 05 801
EMail:sales@cpi.gr
Oki Systems (Iberica), S.A.U
C/Teide, 3
San Sebastian de los Reyes
28703, Madrid
Tel:+34 91 3431620
Fax: +34 91-3431624
Atención al cliente: 902 36 00 36
Website: www.oki.es
Oki Systèmes (France) S.A.
44-50 Av. du Général de Gaulle
94246 L'Hay les Roses
Paris
Tel:+33 01 46 15 80 00
Télécopie:+33 01 46 15 80 60
Website: www.oki.fr
OKI Systems (Magyarország) Kft.
Capital Square
Tower 2
7th Floor
H-1133 Budapest,
Váci út 76
Hungary
Telefon: +36 1 814 8000
Telefax: +36 1 814 8009
Website: www.okihu.hu
OKI Systems (Italia) S.p.A.
via Milano, 11,
20084 Lacchiarella (MI)
Tel:+39 (0) 2 900261
Fax:+39 (0) 2 90026344
Website: www.oki.it
OKI Printing Solutions
Platinium Business Park II, 3rd Floor
ul. Domaniewska 42
02-672 Warsaw
Poland
Tel:+48 22 448 65 00
Fax:+48 22 448 65 01
Website: www.oki.com.pl
E-mail: oki@oki.com.pl
Hotline: 0800 120066
E-mail: tech@oki.com.pl
Oki Systems (Ibérica) S.A.
Sucursal Portugal
Edifício Prime -
Av. Quinta Grande 53
7º C Alfragide
2614-521 Amadora
Portugal
Tel:+351 21 470 4200
Fax:+351 21 470 4201
Website:www.oki.pt
E-mail : oki@oki.pt
Oki Service
Serviço de apoio técnico ao
Cliente
T
e
l: 808 200 197
E-mail : okiserv@oki.pt
OKI Europe Ltd. (Russia)
Office 702, Bldg 1
Zagorodnoye shosse
117152, Moscow
Tel: +74 095 258 6065
Fax: +74 095 258 6070
e-mail: info@oki.ru
Website: www.oki.ru
Technical support:
Tel: +7 495 564 8421
e-mail: tech@oki.ru
Oki Systems (Österreich)
Campus 21
Businesszentrum Wien Sued
Liebermannstrasse A02 603
22345 Brun am Gebirge
Tel: +43 223 6677 110
Drucker Support:
+43 (0) 2236 677110-501
Fax Support:
+43 (0) 2236 677110-502
Website: www.oki.at
OKI Europe Ltd. (Ukraine)
Raisy Opkinoy Street,8
Building B, 2
nd
Floor,
Kiev 02002
Ukraine
Tel: +380 44 537 5288
e-mail: info@oki.ua
Website: www.oki.ua
Harman sok Duran Is Merkezi,
No:4, Kat:6,
34394, Levent
İstanbul
Tel: +90 212 279 2393
Faks: +90 212 279 2366
Web: www.oki.com.tr
www.okiprintingsolutions.com.tr
Oki Systems (Belgium)
Medialaan 24
1800 Vilvoorde
Helpdesk: 02-2574620
Fax: 02 2531848
Website: www.oki.be
AlphaLink Bulgaria Ltd.
2 Kukush Str.
Building "Antim Tower", fl. 6
1463 Sofia, Bulgaria
tel: +359 2 821 1160
fax: +359 2 821 1193
Website: http://bulgaria.oki.com
Διανομέας των συστημάτων OKI
OKI Sistem ve Yazıcı Çözümleri
Tic. Ltd. Şti.
Oki contact details
OKI Printing Solutions
Herstedøstervej 27
2620 Albertslund
Danmark
Adm.: +45 43 66 65 00
Hotline: +45 43 66 65 40
Salg: +45 43 66 65 30
Fax: +45 43 66 65 90
Website: www.oki.dk
Oki Systems (Finland) Oy
Polaris Capella
Vänrikinkuja 3
02600 Espoo
Tel: +358 (0) 207 900 800
Fax: +358 (0) 207 900 809
Website: www.oki.fi
Oki Systems (Holland) b.v.
Neptunustraat 27-29
2132 JA Hoofddorp
Helpdesk: 0800 5667654
Tel:+31 (0) 23 55 63 740
Fax:+31 (0) 23 55 63 750
Website: www.oki.nl
Oki Systems (Norway) AS
Tevlingveien 23
N-1081 Oslo
Tel:+47 (0) 63 89 36 00
Telefax:+47 (0) 63 89 36 01
Ordrefax:+47 (0) 63 89 36 02
Website: www.oki.no
General Systems S.R.L.
(Romania)
Sos. Bucuresti-Ploiesti Nr. 135.
Bucharest 1
Romania
Tel: +40 21 303 3138
Fax: +40 21303 3150
Website: http://romania.oki.com
Var vänlig kontakta din Återförsäljare
i första hand, för konsultation. I
andra hand kontakta
Oki Systems (Sweden) AB
Borgafjordsgatan 7
Box 1191
164 26 Kista
Tel. +46 (0) 8 634 37 00
e-mail:
info@oki.se för allmänna frågor om
Oki produkter
support@oki.se för teknisk support
gällandes Oki produkter
Vardagar: 08.30 - 12.00,
13.00 - 16.00
Website: www.oki.se
Oki Systems (Schweiz)
Baslerstrasse 15
CH-4310 Rheinfelden
Support deutsch +41 61 827 94 81
Support français +41 61 827 94 82
Support italiano +41 061 827 9473
Tel: +41 61 827 9494
Website: www.oki.ch
Oki Data Americas Inc.(United
States • États-Unis)
2000 Bishops Gate Blvd.
Mt. Laurel, NJ 08054
USA
Tel: 1-800-654-3282
Fax: 1-856-222-5247
http://
WWW.OKIPRINTINGSOLUTIONS.COM
http://my.okidata.com
WWW.OKIPRINTINGSOLUTIONS.COM
Oki Data Americas Inc.(América
Latina (OTRO))
2000 Bishops Gate Blvd.
Mt. Laurel, NJ 08054
USA
Tel (Español): 1-856-222-7496
1-856-222-5276
Fax: 1-856-222-5260
Email: LASatisfaction@okidata.com
Oki Data Americas Inc.(Canada •
Canadá)
4140B Sladeview Crescent Unit 7 & 8
Mississauga, Ontario
Canada L5L 6A1
Tél: 1-905-608-5000
Téléc: 1-905-608-5040
http://
WWW.OKIPRINTINGSOLUTIONS.COM
Oki Data de Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
Mariano Escobedo #748, Piso 8
Col. Nueva Anzures
C.P. 11590, México, D.F.
Tel: 52-555-263-8780
Fax: 52-555-250-3501
http://
Oki Data do Brasil, Ltda.
Rua Alexandre Dumas, 2220-80
andar Chácara Santo Antonio
04717-004, São Paulo, SP Brasil
Tel: 55-11-3444-6747 (Grande São
Paulo)
0800-11-5577 (Demais
localidades)
Fax: 5511-3444-3501
e-mail: okidata@okidata.com.br
http://
WWW.OKIPRINTINGSOLUTIONS.COM
Oki Systems (Thailand) Ltd.
1168/81-82 Lumpini Tower,
27th Floor Rama IV Road
Tungmahamek, Sathorn
Bangkok 10120
Tel:(662) 679 9235
Fax:(662) 679 9243/245
http://www.okisysthai.com
Oki Systems (Hong Kong) Ltd.
Suite 1908, 19/F, Tower 3,
China Hong Kong City
33 Canton Road, TsimShaTsui,
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: (852) 3543 9288
Fax: (852) 3549 6040
http://
Comworth Systems Ltd.
8 Antares Place Mairangi Bay,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel:(64) 9 477 0500
Fax:(64) 9 477 0549
http://www.comworth.co.nz
Oki Data(S) P Ltd. Malaysia Rep
Office
Suite 21.03, 21st Floor Menara IGB,
Mid Valley City,
Lingkaran Syed Pura 59200,
Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
Tel: (60) 3 2287 1177
Fax: (60) 3 2287 1166
www.okiprintingsolutions.com.hk
Oki Data(Australia) Pty Ltd.
Levwl1 67 Epping Road, Macquarie Park
NSW 2113, Australia
Tel: +61 2 8071 0000
(Support Tel: 1800 807 472)
Fax: +61 2 8071 0010
http://www.oki.com.au
Oki Data (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.
438A Alexandra Road #02-11/12,
Lobby 3, Alexandra Technopark
Singapore(119967)
Tel:(65) 6221 3722
Fax:(65) 6594 0609
http://www.okidata.com.sg
www.okiprintingsolutions.com
Oki Data Corporation
4-11-22 Shibaura, Minato-ku,Tokyo
108-8551, Japan
44917102EE Rev6
… 190 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Oki MB491 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Oki MB491 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 25,65 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Oki MB491

Oki MB491 User Manual - English - 182 pages

Oki MB491 User Manual - German - 229 pages

Oki MB491 User Manual - German - 210 pages

Oki MB491 User Manual - Dutch - 222 pages

Oki MB491 User Manual - Dutch - 200 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info